Home

Manual - TRS RenTelco

1. SOURce CORRection CSET DATA The commands to edit the Ucor tables are under this node SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 1 GHz to Fmax 1 GHZ to Fmax with option SMR B11 above 10 MHz The command transmits the frequency data for the table selected using SOUR CORR CSET The frequency values must be entered in ascending order RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz 102MHz 103MHz SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 20 to 20dB 20 to 20dB The command transmits the level data for the table selected using SOUR CORR CSET RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA POWer 1dB 0 8dB 0 75dB SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts The command returns the number of list elements This command is a query and hence has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CSET DATA POW POIN SOURce CORRection CSET DELete name of table The command deletes the table indicated from the instrument memory This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CSET DEL UCOR3 1104 3430 12 6 16 E 1 SMR SOURce DM SOURce DM Subsystem In this subsystem the digital modulations ASK and FSK are controlled see Chapter 4 Section Digital Modulations ASK and FSK An external input EXT1 is available as a data source This source is set independently of the type of modulation selected The se
2. FUNCTION MENU VARIATION DATA INPUT SMR 02 Digital Mod Sweep 20 0 dem Help SIGNAL GENERATOR 10MHz 20GHz Modulation Utilities Pulse Output IF Input Level Mem Seq QUICK SELECT 10 000 0000000 ciz LF Output List gt ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Y d Se zu Front panel view 1104 3430 12 Front Panel 6 FUNCTION el e i L HELP Indicates context sensitive auxiliary text STATUS Indicates the instrument status MOD ON OFF Switches on off the modulation selected in Utilities ModKey RF ON OFF Switches on off the RF signal gt Cf Chapter 4 Sections The Help System Status and Chapter 3 Section Use of MOD ON OFF and RF ON OFF keys Exit the menus using the BACK key RF 509 PULSE Input for triggering the pulse generator or for direct control of the pulse modulation EXT ALC Input detection voltage of an external level detector RF 50 Q Output RF signal Cf Chapter 4 Section Switch On Off Internal Level Control Section Pulse Modulation and Section RF ON OFF Key 8 Ee E PRESET Establishes a defined instrument status ERROR Indicates error and caution messages LOCAL Switches the instrument from the REMOTE mode remote control to the LOCAL mode manual control gt Cf Chapter 1 Section Preset Settings Chapter 9
3. o 0 sa E El aparato est BEEN Corriente e Corriente protegido en su Potencia EN EEN continua Gomente continua alterna totalidad por un MARCHA PARADA Stand by DC alterna AC DC AC alslamientade doble refuerzo 1171 0000 42 02 00 p gina 1 Informaciones de seguridad Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar da os y peligros de toda clase Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto Tambi n deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en otro cap tulo de esta documentaci n y que tambi n son obligatorias de seguir En las informaciones de seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Palabras de se al y su significado PELIGRO Indica un punto de peligro con gran potencial de riesgo para el ususario Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves heridas ADVERTENCIA Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo mediano para el usuario Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves heridas ATENCI N Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo peque o para el usuario P
4. SYSTem MSEQuence MODE AUTO STEP The command defines in which way the memory sequence is to be processed by analogy with SOUR SWE MODE AUTO Each trigger event triggers a complete cycle of the memory sequence selected STEP Each trigger event only triggers one step in processing the memory sequence Example SYST MSEQ MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO SYSTem MSEQuence RCL 1 to 50 1 to 50 The command transmits the list of the instrument states to be assumed successively The list contains integers denoting the states stored by means of SAV These instrument states are set successively using a simulated RCL thus the name of the list The length of the list is not limited The values of the list are between 1 and 50 number of memory locations to be called Lists are not influenced by RST Example SYST MSEQ RCL 30 31 32 32 32 33 SYSTem MSEQuence RCL POINts The command queries the length of the RCL list selected The RCL list is user defined and of variable length The maximal length of the list can be queried by means of SYST MSEQ FREE addition of the two values Example SYST MSEQ RCL POIN Answer 17 SYSTem MSEQuence SELect Sequence name The command selects a memory sequence The name of the sequence may be an arbitrary character string of up to 7 letters If there is no memory sequence of the name indicated the command creates it i e this comm
5. REF Output of the internal 10 MHz reference signal with reference internal Input for external reference frequency 10 MHz with reference external gt Cf Chapter 4 Sections LF Output and Internal External Reference Frequency REF OSC Power supply connector and fuse holder gt Cf Chapter 1 Section Power Fuses 3 AUX OC AUX Interface for direct control of additional external devices Pin Designation Assignment 1 MARKER Marker signal output for sweep mode 2 BLANK Blanking signal input for sweep mode TRIGGER Trigger input for sweep memory sequence and list modes 4 STOP Input for stopping the sweep 5 Z AXIS combined MARKER BLANK signal 6 9 GROUND Rear Panel F1 F2 1EC 127 T2 5H 250 NE 2 8 3 5 2 E p 5 S 5 Fig 1 2 Rear panel view 1104 3430 12 SMR RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 C interface used for software update and remote control The pin assignment corresponds to the pin assign ment of a PC gt Cf Chapter 5 Section Interface RS 232 C Ex IEC 625 IEC bus IEEE 488 IEEE 488 Interface for Remote Control Cf Chapter 5 Remote Control IF input for DC 700 MHz only with Option SMR B23 SMR B24 EXT1 Relocation of EXT1 input from the front to the rear panel of the instrument Only with option SMR B19 SMR B20 EXT2 Relocation of EXT2 input from the front to the rear panel of the instrument Only with option SMR B19 SMR
6. SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency Example SOUR FM INT FREQ 10kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal1 EXTernal2 The command selects the modulation source A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1 An external and an internal modulation source can be specified at the same time cf example Example SOUR FM SOUR INT EXT2 RST value for FM1 INT for FM2 EXT2 SOURce FM STATe ON OFF The command switches the frequency modulation on or off Example SOUR FM STAT OFF RST value is OFF 1104 3430 12 6 20 E 1 SMR SOURce FREQuency SOURce FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings of the RF source including the sweeps Command SOURce FREQuency CENTer CW FIXed RCL MANual MODE MULTiplier OFFSet SPAN STARt STOP STEP INCRement Parameters 1 GHz to Fmax 1 GHz to Fmax INCLude EXCLude 1 GHz to Fmax CW FIXed SWEep LIST 1 0 to 10 0 50 to 50 GHz Fmax 1 GHz 1 GHz to Fmax 1 GHZ to Fmax 0 to 10 GHz Default Remark Unit Hz 10 MHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 Hz 10 MHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 Hz 10 MHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 Hz Hz Fmax 10 MHz with Option SMR B11 Hz 10 MHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 Hz 10 MHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 Hz SOURce FREQuen
7. From outside USA 1 410 910 7800 opt 2 Fax 1 410 910 7801 E mail Customer Support rsa rohde schwarz com East Asia Monday to Friday except Singaporean public holidays 8 30 AM 6 00 PM Singapore Time SGT Tel 65 6 513 0488 Fax 65 6 846 1090 E mail Customersupport asia rohde schwarz com Rest of the World Monday to Friday except German public holidays 8 00 17 00 Central European Time CET Tel from Europe 49 0 180 512 42 42 From outside Europe 49 89 4129 13776 Fax 49 0 89 41 29 637 78 E mail CustomerSupport rohde schwarz com amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1007 8684 14 04 00 Adressen Addresses Albania Algeria Antilles Neth Argentina Australia FIRMENSITZ HEADQUARTERS Tel Phone Fax Fax E mail Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG hldorfstra e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen Tel 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 4129 121 64 info rohde schwarz com WERKE PLANTS Rohde amp Schwarz Messger tebau GmbH Tel 49 8331 108 0 Riedbachstra e 58 D 87700 Memmingen Fax 49 8331 108 11 24 Postfach 1652 D 87686 Memmingen __ info rsdmb rohde schwarz com Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Tel 49 9923 857 0 Werk Teisnach Fax 49 9923 857 11 74 aikenrieder Stra e 27 D 94244 Teisnach info rsdts rohde schwarz com Postfach 1149 D 94240 Teisnach Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Dienstleistungszentrum K ln Graf Zeppelin Stra
8. Knob Step User Input value of step size of frequency variation via rotary knob The RF frequency is varied by the entered step size if Knob Step is set to User IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ STEP 1MHz Knob Step Decimal The variation step size corresponds to the position of the digit cursor User User defined the variation step size is as entered under Knob Step User Exclude from Recall Off Normal setting The stored frequency is loaded too when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key or with a memory sequence IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ RCL INCL On The stored frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded ie the current frequency setting is maintained IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ RCL EXCL Frequency Offset and Multiplier On the SMR it is possible to enter an offset and a multiplier for subsequent units if any in the Frequency menu Such entries are taken into account in the frequency displayed in the header line which indicates the frequency of the RF signal at the output of the units in question see Fig 4 2 If both a frequency offset and a multiplier have been entered it is assumed for the calculation that the RF signal is first multiplied and then the offset is added The frequency of the RF output signal is calculated from the frequency offset and multiplier values entered in the Frequency menu as follows RF output frequency frequency offset multiplier The entry of an
9. Reset status reporting system CALL IBWRT generator SRE 168 Permit service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register CALL IBWRT generator ESE 60 Set event enable bit for command exe cution device dependent and query error CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set OPERation enable bit for all events CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set questionable enable bits for all events CALL IBWRT generator STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits ON PEN GOSUB Srq Initialization of the service request routine PEN ON REM Continue main program here STOP End of program A service request is then processed in the service request routine Note The variables userN and userM must be pre assigned usefully Srq RE Service request routin DO SROFOUNDS O FOR 1 userN TO userM Poll all bus users ON ERROR GOTO nouser No user existing CALL IBRSP IS STB Serial poll read status byte IF STB gt 0 THEN This instrument has bits set in the STB SROFOUNDS 1 IF STB AND 16 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Outputqueue IF STB S AND 4 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Failure IF STB AND 8 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Questionablestatus IF S
10. current menu is maintained Return to the menu by means of the BACK key Setting of the RF frequency also in the FREQUENCY menu LEVEL Opens the setting of the RF level via value input or variation by means of a rotary knob The current menu is maintained Return to the menu by means of the BACK key Setting of the RF level also in the LEVEL menu SAVE Opens the storing of the current instrument setting Memory selection is effected by entering a number 1 to 50 and is finished by means of the x1 ENTER key RCL Opens the calling of an instrument setting stored Memory selection is effected by entering a number 1 to 50 and is finished by means of the x1 ENTER key Cf Chapter 3 Sections Use of FREQ and LEVEL Keys RF Frequency RF Level and Storing and Calling of Instrument Settings SMR 02 Digital Mod Sweep Help Be 20 0 dem Modulation Pulse Output IF Input Utilities SIGNAL GENERATOR 10MHz 20GHz Level Mem Seq QUICK SELECT m e EE 40 000000 0000 cue LF Output List Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1104 3430 12 1 4 E 1 FUNCTION MENU VARIATION DATA INPUT SMR 02 Digital Mod Sweep 20 0 dem Help SIGNAL GENERATOR 10MHz 20GHz Modulation Utilities Pulse Output IF Input Level Mem Seq QUICK SELECT 10 000 000 0000 cz
11. 47 23 38 66 00 Fax 47 23 38 66 01 firmapost rsnor rohde schwarz com Tel 968 63 60 00 Fax 968 60 70 66 m aziz mustafasultan com Tel 92 51 227 22 00 Fax 92 51 227 54 98 reza bokhary siemens com pk Tel 63 2 753 14 44 Fax 63 2 753 14 56 Tel 48 22 860 64 94 Fax 48 22 860 64 99 rs poland rspl rohde schwarz com Tel 351 21 415 57 00 Fax 351 21 415 57 10 info rspt rohde schwarz com Tel 40 21 411 20 13 Fax 40 21 410 68 46 rs romania rsro rohde schwarz com Tel 7 095 745 88 50 to 53 Fax 7 095 745 88 54 rs russia rsru rohde schwarz com Rohde amp Schwarz International GmbH Tel 966 1 293 2035 Fax 966 1 466 1657 chris porzky rsd rohde schwarz com Saudi Arabia Serbia Montenegro Singapore Slovak Republic Slovenia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sudan Sweden Switzerland Syria Gentec Haji Abdullah Alireza amp Co Ltd PO Dos 43054 Riyadh Rohde amp Schwarz Representative Office Belgrade ose Jovanovica 7 1030 Beograd Rohde amp Schwarz Regional Headquarters Singapore Pte Ltd Kaki Bukit View 05 01 02 Techview Singapore 415 941 Rohde amp Schwarz Systems amp Communications Asia Pte Ltd Service 1 Kaki Bukit View 04 01 07 Techview Singapore 415 941 Specialne systemy a software a s Svrcia ul 3 841 04 Bratislava 4 Rohde 8 Schwarz Representative Office Ljubljana bili
12. 915 Syntax elements IEC IEEE bus 5 12 Ree EEN 5 13 Test Denter ner ne 4 50 6 8 Textparamotol ssie enisinia ri aiana ieedit 5 10 Transmission parameters PHG 2901 5 4 5 29 Transmission rate DE 222 4 44 TRIG STOP oput 1 11 4 35 4 39 Trigger active edge Tele 4 16 4 24 6 55 TRIGGER Input 6 55 Gate signal 4 16 4 24 T 4 35 6 53 Memory Sequence 4 39 6 54 OSCINOS CODO bi ia 4 27 pulse modulation 00 cceeeeeteeeeeteteteteteennees 4 16 4 24 6 54 SWOOP een T AE 6 52 XY recorder 4 27 THUD values seen ae gg een 5 9 E 1 SMR U Ucor level COrrecti0n oooooconcccinccnocaconccnonncnanananccan 4 8 6 15 Universal commande 5 27 Unlock CANDAMO A a i 4 47 er EE 1 1 User correction Ucor 4 8 6 15 User Request iii denies 5 22 User Request bi 5 20 V GHZ oummut na nannnos 1 11 4 54 Value change A A AA 3 3 INDUIS EE 3 3 VIDEO OUlpuln nu aen nenne renden 4 16 Voltage external modulation sign 4 11 EP e EE 4 21 1104 3430 12 10 7 Index Waveform LF oeneraior cc 4 13 4 14 4 21 6 40 White space E A T 5 12 X AXIS output ennesnnensnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 1 11 4 27 a EE 4 27 6 35 Z AXIS OPU an ner AE 4 27 E 1
13. EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 99042 This is to certify that Equipment type Order No Designation SMR20 1104 0002 20 Signal Generator 1 to 20 GHz SMR27 1104 0002 27 Signal Generator 1 to 27 GHz SMR30 1104 0002 30 Signal Generator 1 to 30 GHz SMR40 1104 0002 40 Signal Generator 1 to 40 GHz SMR50 1134 9008 50 Signal Generator 1 to 50 GHz SMR60 1134 9008 60 Signal Generator 1 to 60 GHz SMR B1 1104 5485 02 Option Reference Oscillator OCXO SMR B5 1104 3501 02 03 Option AM FM SCAN Modulator SMR B11 1104 4250 02 Option Frequency Extension SMR B15 1104 4989 02 Option RF Attenuator 20 GHz SMR B17 1104 5233 02 Option RF Attenuator 40 GHz SMR B19 1104 6281 02 Option Rear Connector SMR B20 1104 6381 02 Option Rear Connector SMR B23 1104 5804 02 Option IF Input 20 GHz SMR B25 1135 1998 02 Option IF Input 0 04 to 6 GHz complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 73 23 EEC revised by 93 68 EEC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN61010 1 1993 A2 1995 EN55011 1998 A1 1999 EN61326 1 1997 A1 1998 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as we
14. LF Output List gt ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Y d Se zu Front panel view 1104 3430 12 Front Panel 4 DATA INPUT Numeric input field l E L Numeric values decimal point and minus sign can be entered by means of the digital keys 0 9 Enters the digit Enters the decimal point I Enters the minus sign Deletes the last input digit sign or decimal point key BACKSPACE Unit keys with enter function E J The unit keys terminate the input of values and specify the multiplication factor for the respective basic unit 7 2 ED The basic units are displayed next to the input field while numbers are entered In the case of level settings the unit keys specify the unit Gin dBuV Selects giga nano with RF level dBuV with LF level dBu M u uV Selects mega micro with level uV k m MV Selects kilo milli with level mV 1x Enter dB m Terminates entries in the basic unit and value inputs without unit Selects with level dBm Selects with level offset and level step width dB In order to change to another level unit simply press the unit key desired Parameter LEVEL must be activated e g by pressing the LEVEL key gt Cf Chapter 3 Section Change Unit of Level 1 5 E 1 Front Panel SMR 02 SIGNAL GENERATOR 10MHz 20GHz gt ROHDE amp SCHWARZ de FUNCTI
15. SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10msto5s The command sets the dwell time per frequency step Example SOUR SWE DWEL 12ms RST value is 15 ms 1104 3430 12 6 35 E 1 SOURce SWEep SMR SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle MANual Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOUR FREQ MAN increases or decreases depending on the direction of the shaft encoder by the value indicated under SOUR FREQ STEP INCR STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The frequency increases by the value indicated under SOUR SWE STEP LOG Example SOUR SWE MODE command the trigger system is not active The frequency AUTO RST value is AUTO SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic RAMP The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings Example SOUR SWE SPAC LIN RST value is LIN SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP The commands to set the step width for linear and logarithmic sweeps are under this node The settings of ST EP LIN and ST EP LOG are independent of each other SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 to 10 GHz The command sets the step width with the linear sweep If STEP LIN is changed the value of POINts valid f
16. SOURce 2 FREQuency MANual 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 6 39 6 39 SOURce2 FREQuency MODE SOURce2 FREQuency STARt CW FlXed SWEep 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 6 39 6 39 SOURce2 FREQuency STOP SOURce2 FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep AOFF 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz SINusoid SQUare 6 39 6 40 6 41 1104 3430 12 SMR List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI info Page SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 6 41 SOURce2 MARKer 1 2 3 FSWeep STATe ON OFF 6 41 SOURce2 MARKer 1 2 3 POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 6 41 SOURce2 SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG not SCPI 6 42 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10msto5s not SCPI 6 42 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP not SCPI 6 42 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency SPACing LINear LOGarithmic not SCPI 6 43 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 to 10 MHz not SCPI 6 43 SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 100PCT not SCPI 6 43 SYSTem SECurity STATe ON OFF SYSTem SERRor 6 50 not SCPI 6 50 SYSTem VERSion 6 50 TEST DIRect Address Subaddress Hex string STATus OPERation EVENt 6 44 STATus OPERation CONDition 6 44 l STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 to 32767 6 44 l STATus OPERation NTRansitio
17. Start Frequency Input of start value for the selected parameter This option is offered only if Frequency is selected as a parameter Increment Frequency Input of increment between two successive values If O is entered as an increment the list will be filled with identical values This option is offered only if Frequency is selected as a parameter Power Input of start value for the selected parameter This option is offered only if Power is selected as a parameter Increment Power Input of increment between two successive values If O is entered as an increment the list will be filled with identical values This option is offered only if Power is selected as a parameter Execute Starts the filling procedure After the execution of the function the menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1104 3430 12 3 11 E 1 List Editor SMR Edit View editing function see Fig 3 8 The Edit View function allows viewing of a complete list or editing individual values of a list If the cursor is on a value in the leftmost column of the list the Edit View mode can be exited by pressing the BACK key The menu cursor goes back to Edit List There is no storage function for the list This means that any modification of the list will be transferred to the internal data set and will be effective on exiting the Edit View function Selection Edit List Edit 10 0000000000 GHz 0 0 dEm OO 101000000000 GHz 01 dBm 0003 10 2000000000 GHz O2 dBm
18. t 169 1138 Budapest siehe see Denmark Rohde amp Schwarz India Pvt Ltd 244 Okhla Industrial Estate Phase III ew Delhi 110 020 Rohde amp Schwarz India Pvt Ltd Bangalore Office o 24 Service Road Domlur 2nd Stage Extension Bangalore 560 071 Rohde amp Schwarz India Pvt Ltd Hyderabad Office 302 amp 303 Millennium Centre 6 3 1099 1100 Somajiguda Hyderabad 500 016 Tel 233 21 77 89 13 Fax 233 21 701 06 20 joblink ghana com Tel 302 10 722 92 13 Fax 302 10 721 51 98 mercury hol gr Tel 852 25 07 03 33 Fax 852 25 07 09 25 stephenchau ese com hk Tel 36 1 412 44 60 Fax 36 1 412 44 61 rs hungary rshu rohde schwarz com Tel 91 11 26 32 63 81 Fax 91 11 26 32 63 73 sales rsindia rohde schwarz com Tel 91 80 535 23 62 Fax 91 80 535 03 61 rsindiab rsnl net Tel 91 40 23 32 24 16 Fax 91 40 23 32 27 32 rsindiah nd2 dot net in Adressen Addresses India Indonesia Iran Ireland Israel Italy Jamaica Japan Jordan Rohde amp Schwarz India Pvt Ltd Mumbai Office B 603 Remi Bizcourt Shah Industrial Estate Off Veera Desai Road Andheri West Mumbai 400 058 PT Rohde amp Schwarz Indonesia Graha Paramita 5th Floor Jin Denpasar Raya Blok D 2 Jakarta 12940 Rohde amp Schwarz Iran Liaison Office Tehran Groundfloor No 1 14th Street Khaled Eslamboli Vozara Ave 15117 Tehran sieh
19. An LF generator which serves as internal modulation source can be fitted in the instrument included in option SMR B5 Part of the settings is effected under SOURce2 Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce AM Option SMR B5 DEPTh 0 to100 PCT PCT EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm Ohm INTernal Option SMR B5 FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz Hz SCAN ON OFF Option SMR B5 SENSitivity 0 to 10 dB V STATe OFF ON SOURce INTernal EXT1 EXT2 STATe ON OFF SOURce AM DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT The command sets the modulation depth in percent Example SOUR 1104 3430 12 AM DEPT 15PCT 6 13 RST value is 30PCT E 1 SOURce AM SMR SOURce AM EXTernal1 2 The commands to set the external AM input are under this node SOURce AM EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external AM input AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not altered RST value is AC Example SOUR AM EXT2 COUP AC SOURce AM EXTernal1 2 IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm The command defines the input impedance of the external AM input This command is coupled to the commands SOURce FM EXTernal IMPedance SOURce DM EXTernal IMPedance RST value is 100 kOhm Example SOUR AM EXT IMP 100kOhm SOURce AM INTernal The settings for the internal AM input are effected under this node Here the same
20. Cannot access hardware The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful Function not supported by this hardware revision A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the function selected Diagnostic A D converter failure Diagnostic A D converter has failed YPLL unlocked The PLL of the YIG loop has not been synchronized No list defined There is no list defined Dwell time adjusted A dwell time given on a list cannot be processed by the unit The setting was automatically adjusted 251 No User Correction Table zero assumed An attempt has been made to switch on user correction but no UCOR table has been stored in the instrument yet The instrument behaves as if a table was called which only contains O values 260 Invalid keyboard input ignored An invalid input via the keyboard is not considered 265 This parameter is read only An attempt has been made to change a fixedly specified value 1104 3430 12 9 7 E 1 Error Messages SMR Continuation Device dependent Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 270 Data output aborted Data output was aborted on the IEC IEEE bus Example The key LOCAL was pressed 304 String too long A character string which is too long was received via the IEC bus The names of lists may have a length of maximally seven letters 305 Fill pattern too long trunctated More data have been
21. ENTER key gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Start Frequency gt Vary the start value for the frequency by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Increment Frequency gt Vary the value of the increment by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Power gt Vary the start value for the power by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Increment Power gt Vary the value of the increment by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key gt The cursor is on Execute Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob to execute the insertion The menu cursor goes back to Edit List Upon pressing the BACK key the editing window is exited without any change being made The menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1104 3430 12 3 9 E 1 List Editor SMR Selection Insert 100 0000000 nmel 10 0 em List Insert Insert At 0001 0004 Start Frequency 100 000 0000 MHz Fig 3 6 Edit function Insert Insert At Input of start index Range Number of el
22. External Trigger Memory Sequence Single run from the beginning to the end of the list The selection of Single does not start a list run The list run is started by means of the Execute Single Sequence function which is displayed below the Mode line IEC IEEE bus commands SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE AUTO TRIG MSEQ SOUR SING Step by step manual processing of list Activating Step stops a running sequence and the cursor moves to the value indicated for Current Index The list can now be scrolled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob IEC IEEE bus commands SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE STEP TRIG MSEQ SOUR SING Single run from the beginning to the end of the list as with Single but triggered by an external signal IEC IEEE bus commands SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE AUTO TRIG MSEQ SOUR EX Step by step run controlled by an external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC IEEE bus commands SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE STEP TRIG MSEQ SOUR EXT Switching off the memory sequence mode IEC IEEE bus command SYST MODE FIX An external signal applied to the rear TRIG STOP input can be used to trigger the memory sequence in the Ext Single and Ext Step operating modes The polarity of the active trigger edge can be set in the Utilities AuxlO Ext Trig Slope
23. Fig 3 8 Edit editing function List Free Len Selection of index Editing of parameters 1104 3430 12 Indication of list number Available space Free 1900 for example means that there is free space for a total of 1900 pairs of values elements in the list memory Occupied space Len 0100 for example means that the current list occupies 100 elements in the list memory gt Select an index by means of the rotary knob or enter an index value by means of the numerical keys gt Select the parameter frequency power to be edited by means of the SELECT key or the rotary knob gt Vary the numerical value by means of the rotary knob or enter a numerical value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key gt Upon pressing the BACK key the menu cursor goes back to the column left of the current column or to the Edit List menu 3 12 E 1 SMR List Editor Delete editing function see Fig 3 9 The Delete function deletes the elements of the indicated range After a delete no gap is left in the list but the remaining elements move up If the indicated range extends beyond the end of the list the elements until the end of the list are deleted The inputs for deleting elements from a list are the same as for inserting elements into a list see Insert editing function Upon pressing the BACK key the editing window will be exited without any change being made The menu cursor goes back to Edit List Sel
24. SOUR FREQ RF output frequency x MULTiplier OFFset The entry of a multiplier does not change the RF output frequency but only the value queried by SOUR FREQ Example SOUR FREQ MULT 2 RST value is 1 SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 50 to 50 GHz The command sets the frequency offset of a mixer which might be series connected cf above FREQ MULT and Chapter 4 Section Frequency Offset and Multiplier Example SOUR FREQ OFFS 100MHz RST value is 0 SOURce FREQuency SPAN Fa 1 GHz with Option SMR B11 Fa 10 MHz This command specifies the frequency range for the sweep This parameter is coupled to the start and stop frequency Negative values for SPAN are permitted then STARt gt STOP is true The following relations hold STARt CENTer SPAN 2 STOP CENTer SPAN 2 RST value is STOP STARt Example SOUR FREQ SPAN 10GHz 1104 3430 12 6 22 E 1 SMR SOURce FREQuency SOURce FREQuency STARt 1 GHz to Fmax 10 MHZ to Fmax with Option SMR B11 This command defines the starting value of the frequency for the sweep operation Parameters STARt STOP SPAN and CENT are coupled to each other STARt may be larger than STOP As to specified range cf FREQ CENT Example SOUR FREQ STAR 2GHz RST value is 10 GHz SOURce FREQuency STOP 1 GHz to Fmax 10 MHZ to Fmax with Option SMR B11 This command indicates the final value of the frequency for the sweep
25. SOURCE INT OPC T End of program As soon as the reference oscillator has settled this subroutine is Program suitable reaction to the OPC service request Enable SRQ routine again kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkkkxkxkkkkkkkkxkkkkxk RE RE F RE REM when the referenc RE CALL IBWRT generators REM Second possibili Opcok SPACES 2 CA IBWRT generators RE here th CA IBRD generator OpcOk REM Third possibility Use of OPC REM In order to be able to use th RE with a National Instruments REM Serial Poll must be changed to CA IBWRT generator SRE 32 CA IBWRT generators ESE 1 ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady PEN ON CALL IBWRT generators REM Continue main program here STOP OpcReady REM REM activated REM ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady RETURN REM 1104 3430 12 7 3 E 1 Programming Examples SMR Service Request The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the respective bits of the transition and enable registers are set In order to be able to use the service request function in conjugation with a National Instruments GPIB driver the setting Disable Auto Serial Poll must be changed to yes by means of IBCONF REM Example of initialization of the SRO in the case of errors CALL IBWRT generatot CLS
26. STATus OPERation register In reading out the content of the CONDition part is not deleted The value returned directly reflects the current hardware state Example STAT OPER COND Answer 1 STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 to 32767 The command Positive TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus OPERation register from 0 to1 for the transitions of the CONDition bits Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 STATus OPERation NTRansition 0 to 32767 The command Negative TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus OPERation register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit Example STAT OPER NTR 0 1104 3430 12 6 44 E 1 SMR STATus STATus OPERation ENABle 0 to 32767 The command sets the bits of the ENABle register This register selectively enables the individual events of the appropriate status event register for the sum bit in the status byte Example STAT OPER ENAB 1 STATus PRESet The command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable are set to 0 Le all events in these registers are not passed on Example STAT PRES STATus QUEStionable The comm
27. SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 to 30 The command sets the IEC bus instrument address RST value is 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 1 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial The command to set the serial interface are under this node The data format is fixedly set to 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit These values cannot be changed The device represents a DTE Data Terminal Equipment in relation to the serial interface Therefore the the controller must be connected via a 0 modem SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 The commands sets the baud rate for both the transmit and the receive direction RST has no influence on this parameter Example SYST COMM SER BAUD 1200 RST value is 9600 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS 7 8 The command sets the length of a data word Example SYST COMM SER BITS RSTvalue is 7 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 1 2 The command defines whether 1 or 2 stop bits are used Example SYST COMM SER SBIT RST value is 1 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS ON IBFull RFR The commands sets the hardware handshake RST has no influence on this parameter ON Interface line RTS is always active IBFull RFR Input Buffer Full Ready For Receiving Interface line RTS remains active as long as the instrument is ready to receive data Example SYST COMM SER CONT RTS ON RST value is RFR SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PACE XON NONE Th
28. Sweep Level 11 000 0000000 oul 20 0 dem Zueepll euel Start Level Stop Level Curent Level Fig 4 24 Sweep Level menu Start Level Input value of start level IEC IEEE bus command Stop Level Input value of stop level IEC IEEE bus command Current Level Display of current level SOUR PO SOUR PO In Step mode Input value of level Step Input value of step size IEC IEEE bus command Dwell Input value of dwell time per step SOUR SW IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SW W STAR 3 W STOP 1 Sweep OdBm OdBm E POW STEP 1dB E POW DWEL 15ms Mode Selection of sweep mode see Operating Modes IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING Reset Sweep Sets the start level IEC IEEE bus command ABOR Exec Single Sweep Starts a single sweep This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC IEEE bus command gt TRIG Marker 1 3 Level Input value of level for the selected marker SOUR MARK1 PSW POW 1dBm IEC IEEE bus command 1104 3430 12 4 31 E 1 Sweep SMR Marker 1 3 State Switching on off selected marker IEC IEEE bus command SOUR MARK1 PSW OFF LF Sweep Settings for LF sweeps can be made in the Sweep Lfgen menu Menu selection Sweep Lfgen Stop Freq Curent Freq 1 0000 kHz 15 0 ms OFF Fig 4 25 Sweep Lfgen menu Start Freq In
29. The contents of the list will be deleted If the query is answered by pressing the BACK key the contents of the list will be retained The selection window is automatically closed upon answering the query Selection Delete List 11 000 0000000 oul 20 0 dem List Delete List EY OOOO List OO00 List 0000 List 0000 List 0000 Lists 0000 Lists 0000 List 0000 Liste 0000 Lists 0000 Back 4 Fig 3 5 Delete List window 1104 3430 12 3 8 E 1 SMR List Editor Edit List When Edit List is selected a pop up menu with the editing functions opens Insert editing function see Fig 3 6 The Insert function inserts a desired number of elements with constant or linearly increasing decreasing values ahead of the element with the indicated start index All elements already existing from the start index are shifted so that they come at the end of the range of elements to be inserted Elements are inserted in a list according to the following procedure When Insert has been selected the menu cursor is on the Insert At menu item gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for At gt Vary the index value by means of the rotary knob or enter an index value using the numerical keys and the ENTER key gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The menu cursor is on the value for Range gt Vary the Range value by means of the rotary knob or enter a value using the numerical keys and the
30. The input and output buffers are full the instrument cannot continue operating 420 Query UNTERMINATED 430 1104 3430 12 9 5 E 1 Error Messages SMR SMR Specific Error Messages The lefthand column of the table below contains the error code In the righthand column the error text entered into the error event queue and shown on the display is in bold type Below the error text there is an explanation of the error Device dependent Error device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 105 Frequency underrange The frequency is below the limit value guaranteed 106 Frequency overrange The frequency is beyond the limit value guaranteed 110 Output unleveled The level control loop is deactivated 115 Level overrange The level is above the limit value guaranteed 116 Level underrange The level is below the limit value guaranteed 117 Dynamic level range exceeded The difference between the maximal and minimal value of a level list is above 20 dBm An exact level setting is no longer guaranteed AM modulation frequency out of range The AM modulation frequency is out of the permissible range FM modulation frequency out of range The FM modulation frequency is out of the permissible range AM modulation overdriven The amplitude modulation cannot generate the set modulation index FM modulator overdr
31. The software handshake is not suitable for the transmission of binary data Here the hardware handshake is to be preferred Hardware handshake With a hardware handshake the instrument signals its readiness for reception via the lines DTR and RTS A logic 0 means ready a logic 1 means not ready Whether or not the controller is ready for reception is signalled to the instrument via the CTS or the DSR line see section Signal Lines The transmitter of the instrument is switched on by a logic O and off by a logic 1 The RTS line remains active as long as the serial interface is active The DTR line controls the instrument s readiness for reception Wiring between instrument and controller Wiring between the instrument and the controller is by means of a null modem ie the data control and signalling lines have to be cross connected The wiring plan below applies to controllers with a 9 pin or 25 pin connector SMR Controller SMR Controller 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 25 pin 1 A 1 1 Am 8 2 m RxD TXD 3 2 RxD TxD 2 3 m TxD RxD 2 3 TxD RxD 3 4 m DTR DSR 6 d DTR DSR 6 5 mn GND GND 5 5 GND GND 7 6 DSR DTR 4 6 DSR DTR 20 RTS CTS 8 ATS CTS 5 8 CTS RTS 7 en CTS RT
32. e 18 D 51147 K ln Postfach 98 02 60 D 51130 K ln Tel 49 2203 49 0 Fax 49 2203 49 51 229 info rsde rohde schwarz com service rsde rohde schwarz com TOCHTERUNTERNEHMEN SUBSIDIARIES Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH Tel 49 89 41 29 137 74 hldorfstra e 15 D 81671 M nchen Fax 49 89 41 29 137 77 Postfach 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen customersupport rohde schwarz com Rohde amp Schwarz International GmbH Tel 49 89 41 29 129 84 hldorfstra e 15 D 81671 M nchen Fax 49 89 41 29 120 50 Postfach 80 14 60 D 81614 M nchen info rusis rohde schwarz com Rohde amp Schwarz Engineering and Sales Tel 49 89 41 29 137 11 GmbH Fax 49 89 41 29 137 23 hldorfstra e 15 D 81671 M nchen info rse rohde schwarz com Postfach 80 14 29 D 81614 M nchen R amp S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH Fritz Hahne Str 7 D 31848 Bad M nder Postfach 2062 D 31844 Bad M nder Tel 49 5042 998 0 Fax 49 5042 998 105 info rsbick rohde schwarz com Rohde amp Schwarz FTK GmbH Wendenschlossstra e 168 Haus 28 D 12557 Berlin Tel 49 30 658 91 122 Fax 49 30 655 50 221 info ftk rohde schwarz com Rohde amp Schwarz SIT GmbH Agastra e 3 D 12489 Berlin Tel 49 30 658 84 0 Fax 49 30 658 84 183 info sit rohde schwarz com R amp S Systems GmbH Graf Zeppelin Stra e 18 D 51147 K ln Postfach 98 02 60 D 51130 K ln Tel 49 2203 49 5 23 25 Fax 49
33. instrument settings 2 u222nesnnnnenennnnnennenennnnnnnnnnene nen 4 38 manual processing of list operating mocdes 4 38 Menu ACCESS ss nn as SEENEN ES ENEE ENEE EE 3 2 Calls 8 4 Digital MOVASK oooooocccoccccncoo 4 19 Digital e 4 20 ERROR 2 2 GT Delde 37 Frequency 41 EE EE 4 56 IfInput 4 22 Level Alc 4 7 Level LV viii iii ege dg 4 3 Level Ucor 4 8 4 9 tere 4 21 Elis meine 4 36 EE EE 4 40 4 41 Modulation ANM 3 2 4 13 Modulation Pulse 4 15 Modulation EM 4 14 ee E 4 23 STATUS Eege eege Eiere Eege 4 56 SHON EEE AI A EI E ETRE 3 4 1104 3430 12 10 4 SMR A aa a e 3 15 Sweep Freq 4 29 Sweep Level 4 31 Sweep Lfgen 4 32 Utilities 4 42 Utilities AuxlO Utilities Calib 4 48 Utilities Diag Conte 4 49 Utilities Diag Param nennen 4 51 Utilities Diag TPoint esaeeneernennsnnennennnnnnnenennnn 4 50 Utilities Display AAA 4 42 Utilities MOOK CY AAA 4 53 Utilities ProteCt ooocoocccnccinoconocanocanornnnranonrnrnranonons 4 47 Utilities ROfOSC cocinan 4 46 Utilities SOU iii il tie 4 55 Utilities SY EE 4 42 Utilities System GPIB Address Utilities System Language S Utilities System HG232 4 44 Utilities System Geck 4 45 Utilities Test Be Menu cursor Message OVEN COD 1 Messages device messages ecc
34. of each operating mode of the list mode This signal can be used for accurate synchronization with short dwell times to trigger other instruments and indicates the first stable output frequency occurring TRIGGER Input MARKER Output Frequency Fig 4 26 Example of signal in list mode Mode Ext Step 1104 3430 12 4 35 E 1 List Mode SMR Settings for the list mode can be made in the List menu Menu selection List 10 0000000000 ch ListO Insert Fig 4 27 List menu Mode Selection of operating mode see Section Operating Modes IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR SING Execute Single List Starts a single run of the list This menu option is visible only if Mode Single is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG LIST Reset List Selects the starting point IEC IEEE bus command ABOR LIST Dwell Input value of dwell time per step IEC IEEE bus command SOUR LIST DWEL 10ms Current Index Display of current level In Step mode input value of current list index Select List Selection of a list or creation of a new list cf Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SOUR LIST SEL LIST2 Delete List Deletion of a list cf Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SOUR LIST DEL LIST1 Edit List Selection of editor function for editing a list cf Chapter 3 Section List
35. refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by Rohde amp Schwarz including instruments systems and all accessories Tags and their meaning DANGER This tag indicates a safety hazard with a high potential of risk for the user that can result in death or serious injuries WARNING This tag indicates a safety hazard with a medium potential of risk for the user that can result in death or serious injuries CAUTION This tag indicates a safety hazard with a low potential of risk for the user that can result in slight or minor injuries ATTENTION This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage to the product NOTE This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention to operating the product but which does not lead to damage These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the associated documentation and the associated product The use of tags in connection with unassociated products or unassociated documentation can result in misinterpretations and thus contribute to personal injury or material damage Basic safety instructions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer Its vent
36. 06 41 59 82 70 rsi info rsi rohde schwarz com Tel 81 3 59 25 12 88 Fax 81 3 59 25 12 90 scj support rsjp rohde schwarz com Tel 81 4 54 77 35 70 Tel 81 6 63 10 96 51 Tel 962 6 462 17 29 Fax 962 6 465 96 72 jocrown go com jo Kazakhstan Kenya Korea Kuwait Latvia Lebanon Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Macedonia Malaysia Malta Mexico Moldava Nepal Rohde amp Schwarz Kazakhstan Representative Office Almaty Pl Respubliki 15 480013 Almaty Excel Enterprises Ltd Dunga Road P 0 Box 42 788 airobi Rohde amp Schwarz Korea Ltd 83 29 Nonhyun Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 010 Group Five Trading 8 Contracting Co Mezzanine Floor Al Bana Towers Ahmad Al Jaber Street Sharq Rohde amp Schwarz Danmark A S Latvian Branch Office erkela iela 21 301 1050 Riga Rohde amp Schwarz Liaison Office Riyadh P 0 Box 361 Riyadh 11411 etcom PO Box 55199 Op Ex Presidential Palace Horch Tabet Beirut siehe see Switzerland Rohde amp Schwarz Danmark A S Lithuanian Branch Office Lukiskiu 5 228 2600 Vilnius siehe see Belgium ETRA Sarski odred 7 1000 Skopje o 2 Lorong Dungun Kiri Damansara Heights 50490 Kuala Lumpur 21 B Kara Road San Gwann SGN 08 Rohde amp Schwarz de Mexico S de R L de C V German Centre Oficina 4 2 2 Av Santa F 170 Col Lomas de Santa F 01210 Mexico D F siehe see Austria ICTC Pvt
37. 12 Note The contents of lists as they are used for the List mode or for user correction Ucor is not saved in the SAVE memory It is stored under the respective list name and can be called If instrument settings are called which go back to list data such as level setting using Ucor the current list contents is used If this has been altered it is not identical to the list contents at the point of storing any more 1104 3430 12 3 14 E 1 SMR Menu Summary Frequency Level Level ALC Ucor EMF Modulation AM FM Pulse Digital Mod FAA ASK FSK LF Output Pulse Output IF Input Sweep Freq NE Level LFGen List Mem Seq Display Utilities System Ref Osc Protect Calib Diag Test ModKey Aux I O Setup Help 1104 3430 12 Menu Summary Option SMR B5 Option SMR B5 Option SMR B5 Option SMR B5 Option SMR B5 Option SMR B14 Option SMR B23 24 Option SMR B5 GPIB RS232 Security Language 3 Ref Osc Config Level _ TPoint MainboardB Param LFGen Loop Gain 3 15 E 1 SMR RF Frequency 4 Instrument Functions This chapter describes the functions of the instrument and its options which can be activated manually via menus or by remote control frequency and level settings analog an
38. 2203 49 5 23 36 info rssys rohde schwarz com ADRESSEN WELTWEIT ADDRESSES WORLDWIDE siehe see Austria Rohde amp Schwarz Tel 213 21 48 20 18 Bureau d Alger Fax 213 21 69 46 08 5B Place de Laperrine 16035 Hydra Alger siehe see Mexico Precision Electronica S R L Av Pde Julio A Roca 710 6 Piso 1067 Buenos Aires Tel 541 14 331 10 67 Fax 541 14 33451 11 alberto lombardi prec elec com ar Rohde amp Schwarz Australia Pty Ltd Tel 61 2 88 45 41 00 Sales Support Fax 61 2 96 38 39 88 Unit 6 sales rsaus rohde schwarz com 2 8 South Street Rydalmere N S W 2116 Austria Azerbaijan Bangladesh Barbados Belarus Belgium Belize Bermuda Bosnia Herzegovina Brazil Brunei Bulgaria Canada Chile China Rohde amp Schwarz sterreich Ges m b H Am Europlatz 3 Geb ude B 1120 Wien Rohde amp Schwarz Azerbaijan Liaison Office Baku ISR Plaza 5th floor 340 Nizami Str 370000 Baku BIL Consortium Ltd Corporate Office House 33 Road 4 Block F Banani Dhaka 1213 siehe see Mexico siehe see Ukraine Rohde amp Schwarz Belgium N V Excelsiorlaan 31 Bus 1 1930 Zaventem exico siehe see siehe see Mexico siehe see Slovenia Rohde amp Schwarz Do Brasil Ltda Tel 43 1 602 61 41 0 Fax 43 1 602 61 41 14 rs austria rsoe rohde schwarz com Tel 994 12 93 31 38 Fax 994 12 93 03 14 rs azerbaijan rsd roh
39. 232 C interface is permanently set for 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit This data format corresponds to the IEEE P1174 draft standard The baud rate and handshake can be manually changed in the Utilities System RS232 menu gt Call Utilities System RS232 menu gt Select desired baud rate and handshake gt Terminate input using the 1x ENTER key Indications during Remote Control The remote control state is indicated by RS 232 Remote or Local on the STATUS page In the REMOTE state the STATUS page is always displayed Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation can be made via the front panel gt Press LOCAL key Note Before switchover command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately 1104 3430 12 5 4 E 1 SMR Messages Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus can be divided into two groups interfaces messages and device messages No interface messages are defined for the RS 232 C interface Interface Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line being active They are used for communication between the controller and the instrument and can only be sent by a controller which has the IEC IEEE bus control Interface commands can be subdivided into universal commands and addressed commands Universal commands act on all dev
40. 35 Utilities System R8232 menu 20unneensnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 4 44 Fig 4 36 Utilities System Security men 4 45 Fig 4 37 Utilities RefOsc menu preset Setting 4 46 Fig 4 38 Utilities Protect menu preset Setting 4 47 Fig 4 39 Utilities Calib menu preset Setting 4 48 Fig 4 40 Utilities Diag CONTIG MENU s srein lapa 4 49 Fig 4 41 Utilities Diag TPoint menu een an 4 50 Fig 4 42 Utilities Diag Param menu 4 51 Fig 4 43 Menu Utilities TOS cion ls 4 52 Fig 4 44 Utilities ModKey menu preset setting oooonoccccnonoccccnonoccccnanancccnnnancccnanancncnananccnnnnns 4 53 Fig 4 45 Utilities AUXIO MENU incurran tina caida cadecnadeeeatade REESEN eg dee ar 4 54 Fig 4 46 Utilities Setup men 4 55 Fig 4 47 HE Rn EE 4 56 Fig 5 1 Tree structure of SCPI command systems coooococonoccconoccnoncnononcnono na noncncnnnn naar nn nnnannnncnns 5 7 Fig 5 2 Device model for remote control via the IEC IEEE bus 5 13 Fig 5 3 Status register model 5 16 Fig 5 4 Overview of status registers oooonocinncccincccnnnccnnonnonannnnncccnnrnnn nr 5 18 Fig 5 5 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE bus Interface 5 25 Fig 5 6 Pin assignment of RS 232 C interface ooonoconnnncinininnnccnocccnnornnnnannnnnnc cnn rnnnnn cnn 5 28 Fig 5 7 Wiring of data control and signalling lines for hardware handshake A 5 30 Fig 9 1 ERROR Page mistica al atada te 9 1 1104 3430 12 10 E 1 Before p
41. 5 20 Execution Error bit 5 20 Exponent 9 10 EXT AL e 1 7 EXT1 2 COUDIING EE input impedance ie Externalreference n nn ennunnileenhnmenfsn 4 46 External trigger active edge PULSE input creirai 4 16 4 24 6 55 TRIGGER Input ees este esse 6 55 Ets EES 4 35 6 53 Memory Sequence nenn 4 39 6 54 pulse modulation 4 16 4 24 6 54 E EE 6 52 1104 3430 12 10 2 SMR FM CODING masse rien a a 6 19 coupling type deviation eseese i ae iia To e ET Frequency QCCUIACY EE 1 2 AUS MOE cies Sege ita EN 4 46 6 34 AM manner 4 13 6 14 correction VAIUC secccccneccecsserseetotecstoneccesestetesseetssesseers 6 34 EM eegene 4 14 6 20 INGICAUON E 3 1 LF generator 6 39 LF sweep 6 39 CEET 6 25 ler 4 1 6 22 Offset 4 1 4 2 6 22 RF output sonal 6 21 RE SWEEP stcccesescsesoteceees 6 23 suppression Of indication uununnernenrnenneenennnnennenn 4 45 Frequency marker ME EE 6 41 RF sweep Hd Frequency Modulation EM 6 19 Frequency sweep LEP Eet 4 32 6 42 e 6 22 ELO EDO at 1 4 FSK modulation 6 18 RUSe EE 1 9 G Gate signal ie E 4 16 4 24 GET Group Execute Trigger ooooooocccincconcciccccnccancccnnono 5 14 Handshake DG 2239 4 44 5 30 6 47 Header teommande nenn nnnennner nennen 5 6 Header field display nel Help texts ciar ro diia 4 56 IEC IEEE bus Tele 4 43 6 47 brief Im
42. B20 PULSE Relocation of PULSE input from the front to the rear panel of the instrument Only with option SMR B19 SMR B20 EXT ALC Relocation of EXT ALC input from the front to the rear panel of the instrument Only with option SMR B19 SMR B20 1 10 E 1 SMR Rear Panel X AXIS V GHz_ TRIG STOP gt Or F1 F2 1EC 127 T2 5H 250 X AXIS Output voltage ramp 0 to 10 V in the sweep operating mode V GHz Output of frequency proportional voltage Selectable from 0 5 V GHz to 1 V GHz TRIG STOP Input to trigger sweep memory sequence list mode and to stop the sweep gt Cf Chapter 4 Sections Sweep Inputs and Sweep s 8 NE g 28 8 g S 2 d e S Outputs fe 2 RF Relocation of RF input from the front to the rear panel of the instrument Only with option SMR B19 SMR B20 PULSE VIDEO Output of pulse generator or video output only with Option SMR B14 SYNC Output SYNC signal for pulse modulation Cf Chapter 4 Sections Pulse Modulation and PULSE VIDEO Output Fig 1 2 Rear panel view 1104 3430 12 1 11 E 1 SMR Sample Setting for First Users 2 Short Tutorial The present chapter contains a short tutorial with sample settings allowing the users to operate immediately the instrument Sample Setting for First Users Setting frequency and level of the RF output signal First frequency and level of the RF output signal are set via keys FREQ and LEVEL in the DATA INPUT
43. B23 IF input 20 GHz SMR20 SMR B24 IF input 40 GHz SMR27 SMR30 SMR40 be ER ajo N o BR o m Example for a device response SMR B1 SMR B3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SMR B15 0 0 0 1104 3430 12 6 4 E 1 SMR Common Commands PRE 0 to 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the value indicated Query PRE returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form PSC 0 1 POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is maintained or reset in switching on PSC 0 causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained Thus a service request can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status registers ESE and SRE PSC 0 resets the registers Query PSC reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag The response can be 0 or 1 RCL 1 to 50 RECALL calls the instrument state which was stored under the number supplied using command GAN 50 instrument states can be stored RST RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status The command essentially corresponds to pressing the PRESET key The state of the RF output is an exception The RF output is deactivated after RST however it is activated after the RESET key has been pressed The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands SAV 1 to 50 SAVE stores the current instrument state under the number
44. Handshake AH1 Handshake drain function Acceptor Handshake L4 Listener function T6 Talker function ability to respond to serial poll SR1 Service request function Service Request PP1 Parallel poll function RL1 Remote local switchover function DCH Reset function Device Clear DT1 Trigger function Device Trigger 1104 3430 12 5 26 E 1 SMR Interfaces Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the ATN Attention line being active LOW These messages serve for communication between the controller and the instrument Universal Commands Universal commands are in the code range 10 to 1F hex They act on all instruments connected to the bus without addressing them before Table 5 6 Universal commands Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear IBCMD controller CHR 20 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting IFC Interface Clear IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default state LLO Local Lockout IBCMD controller CHR 17 Manual switchover to LOCAL is disabled SPE Serial Poll Enable IBCMD controller CHR 24 Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable IBCMD controller CHR 25 End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure IBCMD controller CHR 21 End of p
45. Ltd Hattisar Post Box No 660 Kathmandu Rohde amp Schwarz Malaysia Sdn Bhd Suite 10 04 Level 10 Wisma E amp C Tel 7 32 72 67 23 54 Fax 7 32 72 67 23 46 rs kazakhstan rsd rohde schwarz com Tel 254 2 55 80 88 Fax 254 2 54 46 79 Tel 82 2 34 85 19 00 Fax 82 2 547 43 00 sales rskor rohde schwarz com service rskor rohde schwarz com Tel 965 244 91 72 73 74 Fax 965 244 95 28 jk_agarwal yahoo com Tel 371 7 50 23 55 Fax 371 7 50 23 60 latvia rsdk rohde schwarz com Tel 966 1 465 64 28 Ext 303 Fax 966 1 465 64 28 Ext 229 chris porzky rsd rohde schwarz com Tel 961 1 48 69 99 Fax 961 1 49 05 11 tohme sayar netcomm tv Tel 370 5 239 50 10 Fax 370 5 239 50 11 lithuania rsdk rohde schwarz com Tel 389 2 329 82 30 Fax 389 2 317 74 88 netra netra com sk Tel 60 3 20 94 00 33 Fax 60 3 20 94 24 33 sales malaysia rohde schwarz com ektraco International Technology Ltd Tel 356 21 37 43 00 or 37 80 88 Fax 356 21 37 66 67 sales tektraco com Tel 52 55 85 03 99 13 Fax 52 55 85 03 99 16 latinoamerica rsd rohde schwarz com Tel 977 1 443 48 95 Fax 977 1 443 49 37 icte mos com np Adressen Addresses Netherlands New Zealand Nicaragua Nigeria Norway Oman Pakistan Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay Philippines Poland Portugal Republic Dominican
46. MANual 130 dBm to 25 dBm dBm LIMit MANual STARt and STOP MODE CW FIXed SWEep LIST BG Cee a STARt 130 dBm to 25 dBm dBm STOP 130 dBm to 25 dBm dBm STEP INCRement 0 1 to 10 dB dB SOURce POWer ALC The commands checking the automatic level control are under this node SOURce POWer ALC REFerence 0 to 3 V This command defines the reference voltage for operation with an external diode detector or with power meters from Hewlett Packard Example SOUR POW ALC REF RST value is 3 V SOURce POWer ALC SEArch This command defines under which conditions the control loop is temporarily closed The command is suitable only if SOUR ALC STAT is set to OFF This command is a query and hence has no RST value Example SOUR POW ALC SEAR SOURce POWer ALC SOURce INTernal DIODe PMETer The command selects the detector for power control INTernal The internal detector is used DIODe A diode detector can be connected at the external ALC input PMETer A power meter can be connected at the external ALC input Example SOUR POW ALC SOUR INT RST value is INT 1104 3430 12 6 29 E 1 SOURce POWer SMR SOURce POWer ALC SOURce PMETer RS_NRVS HP436A The command indicates the type of power meter connected RS_NRVS Rohde amp Schwarz NRVD or NRVS Id Nr 857 8008 02 or 1020 1809 02 HP436A Hewlett Packard HP436A HP437 HP438A Example SOUR POW ALC SOUR PMET RS_NRVS RST value is RS_NRVS
47. MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING TRIG2 SOUR SING TRIG SOUR SING Step Step by step manual run within the sweep limits Activating Step stops a running sweep and the cursor moves to the value indicated for Current The sweep can now be controlled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob or the numeric keys IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE STEP SOUR2 SWE MODE STEP SOUR SWE POW MODE STEP TRIG SOUR SING TRIG2 SOUR SING TRIG SOUR SING Ext Single Single sweep from start point to stop point as with Single but triggered by an external signal IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG2 SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT 1104 3430 12 4 26 E 1 SMR Ext Step Off Sweep Inputs TRIG STOP Sweep Step by step run controlled by an external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREOQO MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE STEP SOUR2 SWE
48. POWer STEP INCRement 0 1 to 10 dB 6 31 SOURce PULM EXTernal lMPedance 50 Ohm to 10 kOhm 6 32 SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerted 6 32 SOURce PULM SOURce EXTernal INTernal 6 32 SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF 6 32 SOURce PULSe DELay 20 ns to 1 3 s 6 33 SOURce PULSe DOUBIe DELay 60 ns to 1 3 s 6 33 SOURce PULSe DOUBIe STATe ON OFF 6 33 SOURce PULSe PERiod 100 ns to 85 s 6 33 SOURce PULSe WIDTh 20 ns to 1 3 s 6 33 l SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF not SCPI 6 34 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 2048 to 2047 not SCPI 6 34 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal 6 34 SOURce SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG not SCPI 6 35 SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10 ms to 5s not SCPI 6 35 l SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP not SCP 6 36 SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic not scr 6 36 l SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 to 10 GHz 0 01 to 10PCT not SCH 6 36 not SCPI 6 36 SOURce SWEep POWer DWELI 10msto5s not sch 6 36 SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO MANual STEP not SCPI 6 37 SOURce SWEep POWer SPACing LOGarithmic not SCPI 6 37 SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic 0 to 160 dB not SCPI 6 37 SOURce2 FREQuency CW FlXed
49. Q or 10 kQ input impedance IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULM EXT IMP 50 4 24 E 1 SMR Sweep Sweep The SMR features digital step by step sweep for the following parameters e HE frequency e LF frequency e FF level In addition to digital step by step sweep analog sweep for the RF frequency and RF level is possible by switching on frequency or amplitude modulation with an internal sawtooth signal A sweep is set in five basic steps which are demonstrated by the following example ie the setting of a frequency sweep 1 Set sweep range Start Freq and Stop Freq or Center Freq and Span 2 Select linear or logarithmic sweep Spacing 3 Select step size Step Lin and dwell time Dwell 4 Activate marker if desired Marker 5 Switch on sweep Mode set to Auto Single or Step Setting the Sweep Range Start Freq Stop Freq Center Freq Span The sweep range for RF sweeps can be entered in two ways Either the Start Freq and Stop Freq are entered or Center Freq and Span Please note that the two parameter sets mutually affect each other as follows Start Freq altered Stop Freq unaltered Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq 2 Span Stop Freq Start Freq Stop Freq altered Start Freq unaltered Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq 2 Span Stop Freq Start Freq Center Freq altered Span unaltered Start Freq Center Freq Span 2 Stop Freq Center Freq Span 2 Span altered Center Freq un
50. QUERY queries the instrument identification The device response is for example Rohde amp Schwarz SMR20 00000001 1 04 02 variant identification 00000001 serial number 1 04 firmware version number IST INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form 0 1 The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll OPC OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request OPC OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY returns 1 if all preceding commands have been executed It is necessary to consider a sufficiently long time out for the IEEE IEC bus OPT OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed The options are separated from each other by means of commas For every option a fixed position is provided in the response Table 6 2 Device Response to OPT Position Option SMR B1 Reference oscillator OXCO reserved SMR B3 Frequency resolution 0 1 Hz SMR B4 Ramp sweep SMR B5 AM FM scan modulator reserved SMR B11 Frequency extension 0 01 1 GHz SMR B14 Pulse generator SMR B15 RF attenuator 20 GHz SMR20 SMR27 SMR B17 RF attenuator 40 GHz SMR30 SMR40 SMR B19 Rear panel connectors RF LF SMR20 SMR27 SMR B20 Rear panel connectors RF LF SMR30 SMR40 SMR
51. RF sweep 4 30 6 23 Start level level sweep nenn 6 31 Status REMOTE Re a a aiaa 5 3 Status line display F STATUS Page nn EN A 56 Status registers DOS A eai 5 19 e LEE 5 18 Status reporting system 5 16 reset Valie S iia en VEA Ae 5 24 structure of an SCPI status regieier 5 16 USO elise O NE 5 22 STATus OPERation register oooooonocionicinccconccconncnanarannano 6 44 STATus QUEStionable registert ernennen 6 45 STB status Die 5 19 Step size LOLLY KNOD tee NE 4 2 4 4 Step width 1104 3430 12 10 6 SMR MOVE ee ee Eeer E 6 31 LF sweep power sweep RF sweep Stop bit DE 222 4 44 5 29 6 47 Stop frequency E EIEE 22 22 OE 6 39 4 30 6 23 Stop level level sweep ooooocociconiciciccconcconcccocananccanccancnno 6 31 Store instrument SettiNgQS ocoonnnnncnnnncccnnnccccnnanancnarana nana nos 3 14 A O NN 3 4 Storing 5 SUING EE 5 11 Structure command Mitte ANB as 5 6 command lines Subroutines RE 5 17 SUIM GOVIALION nennen inap 4 11 Sum modulation depth two tone mocdulaton canon 4 11 Suppression INDICATION EE 4 45 SWeep Input level sweep LF sweenp operating modes QU PUES 0 eeeeeeeee power sween RF blanking method MESWEOD E 4 29 6 22 6 35 run LE SWEED an nenn 6 42 RF sweep 6 36 trigger enneene 6 52 SYNC out 1 11 Synchronization IEC IEEE bus
52. SMR B11 The command sets the frequency if SWE MODE MAN and FREQ MODE SWE are set Only frequency values between the settings with SOUR FREQ STAR and STOP are permitted As to the permitted range cf FREQ CENT Example SOUR FREQ MAN 5GHz RST value is 10 GHz SOURce FREQuency MODE CW FIXed SWEep LIST The command specifies the operating mode and hence also specifies which commands control the FREQuency subsystem The parameters are assigned as follows CW FIXed CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is specified by means of SOUR FREQ CW FIX SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep mode The frequency is specified by means of commands SOUR FREQ STAR STOP CENT SPAN MAN LIST The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings The settings are effected in the SOUR LIST Subsystem Setting SOUR FREQ MODE LIST automatically sets command SOUR POW MODE to LIST as well Example SOUR FREQ MODE LIST RST value is CW SOURce FREQuency MULTiplier 1 0 to 10 0 The command is used to enter the multiplier of a possible frequency multiplier connected in series see Chapter 4 Section Frequency Offset and Multiplier If a multiplier or a frequency offset value have been entered the frequency entered using SOUR FREQ Is no longer identical with the RF output frequency The following relation holds
53. address of the SMR CALL IBFIND gpib0 pc set IEC Bus address of the PC CALL IBPAD pc pcadr CALL IBFIND dev1 generator SMR can be controlled under Devicel CALL IBPAD generator gen_adr Main program Command sour corr coll SCPI command for automatic UCOR a pcb STR pcadr tells the SMR to return control CALL IBWRT generator a to the address pcadrs afterwards CALL IBWRT generator Command Readout of the command itself CALL IBPCT generator Control is given to the SMR r Waiting for return of control MASK amp H4020 t CIC or Timeout CALL IBWAIT brd MASK IF IBSTAS AND H4000 THEN PRINT Timeout control not received END ELSE PRINT Control taken back END IF 104 3430 12 7 6 E 1 SMR Maintenance 8 Maintenance The present chapter describes the measures that are necessary for maintaining storing and packing the instrument The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the outside of the instrument However it is recommended to check the rated data from time to time Cleaning the Outside The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft line free dustcloth Caution Do not use solvents such as thinners acetone and similar things in any case because otherwise the front panel labeling or plastic parts will be dama
54. amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual MICROWAVE SIGNAL GENERATOR R amp S SMR20 1104 0002 20 R amp S SMR27 1104 0002 27 R amp S SMR30 1104 0002 30 R amp S SMR40 1104 0002 40 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1104 3430 12 02 1 SMR Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview Contents Data Sheet Safety Instructions Certificate of Quality EC Certificate of Conformity List of R amp S Representatives Short Tutorial About How to Use the Manual Divider 1 Chapter 1 Preparation for Use 2 Chapter 2 Introduction to Operation 3 Chapter 3 Manual Operation 4 Chapter 4 Functions 5 Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 6 Chapter 6 Remote Control Commands 7 Chapter 7 Remote Control Programming Examples 8 Chapter 8 Maintenance 9 Chapter 9 Error Messages 10 Chapter 10 Index 1104 3430 12 RE E 1 SMR Contents Contents 1 Putting into Operation ahnen ah EEN N 1 1 General Instructi ns 2 2 22 edd SEELEN 1 1 Unpacking the EE 1 1 Supply VO Age darias 1 1 Howto Ensi re EM O e eege EES 1 1 Power FUSES ai 1 2 Switching On Off the Instrument unzuusrsannsnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnnn nn 1 2 IAS EE 1 2 RAM With Battery PackUp eebe EES alas 1 2 A see a eea a ara E ee aAa chenevenccustuseensbexenced tides 1 3 Functional Nest aE E E TNE AEN E T 1 3 Mounting intoa 19 Rack 1 3
55. and or MOD ON OFF cf Sections RF ON OFF Key and MOD ON OFF Key RF ON OFF key gt Press RF ON OFF key The RF output signal is switched on off IEC IEEE bus short command OUTP STAT ON MOD ON OFF key gt Press MOD ON OFF key Modulation is switched on off A direct IEC bus command is not available The modulations have to be switched on and off in the respective modulation submenus Changing Unit of Level For the level the unit of the value set can be changed without a new value input Change level unit gt Activate Level parameter Press LEVEL key or set menu cursor in the level menu to the setting value of the Amplitude parameter gt Press the unit key with with the desired level unit The level is indicated in the desired unit 1104 3430 12 3 5 E 1 Basic Operating Steps SMR Correction of Input Digits can be corrected by one of the following keys before the input is confirmed by the Enter key Key The backspace key deletes the value entered digit by digit When the last digit is deleted the previous value is displayed BACK key Pressing the BACK key deletes the entire entry and results in the previous value being indicated again For a subsequent new input in the setting menu the menu cursor is to be set to the setting value again using the SELECT key For a subsequent new input via the FREQ or LEVEL keys the respective key has to be pressed again FREQ L
56. are taken from the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard Same commands have the same effect on different devices The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in detail in Chapter 5 Table 6 1 Common Commands Command Parameter Unit Remark CLS No query ESE 0 to 255 ESR Query only IDN Query only IST Query only E OPC Query only OPT Query only PRE 0 to 255 Psc Pon 77 RCL 1 to 50 No query RST No query SAV 1 to 50 No query SRE 0 to 255 STB Query only TRG No query wa CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer ESE 0 to 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated Query ESE returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form ESR STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form 0 to 255 and subsequently sets the register to zero 1104 3430 12 6 3 E 1 Common Commands SMR IDN IDENTIFICATION
57. change the RF output level but only the value queried by Pow The level offset is also valid for level sweep Only dB is permissible as a unit here linear units V W etc are not permitted Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL OFFS 0 or POW OFFS 0 RST value is 0 dB SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 130 dBm to 25 dBm without Option SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm The command limits the maximum RF output level in operating mode CW and SWEEP It does not influence the display LEVEL and the answer to query POW Example SOUR POW LIM AMPL 15 RST value is 16 dBm 1104 3430 12 6 30 E 1 SMR SOURce POWer SOURce POWer MANual 130 dBm to 25 dBm without Option SMR B15 20 to 25 dBm The command sets the level if SOUR POW MODE is set to SWE and SOUR SWE MODE to MAN Only level values between STARt and STOP are permitted as to specified range cf POW AMPL Example SOUR POW MAN 1dBm RST value is 30 dBm or 20 dBm SOURce POWer MODE CW FIXed SWEep LIST The command specifies the operating mode and thus also by means of which commands the level setting is checked CW FIXed The output level is specified by means of commands under SOUR POW LEV SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep mode The level is specified by means of SOUR POW STAR STOP CENT SPAN and MAN LIST The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings The settings are effected in the SOUR L
58. controller can be connected e Software handshake XON XOFF e Hardware handshake RxD DTR DSR CTS Fig 5 6 Pin assignment of RS 232 C interface Signal Lines RxD Receive Data Data line transmission from external controller to instrument TxD Transmit Data Data line transmission from instrument to external controller DTR Data terminal ready Output logic zero active With DTR the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data The DTR line controls the instruments readiness for reception GND Interface ground connected to instrument ground DSR Data Set Ready In the case of instruments with a VAR2 REV3 front module the DSR line is used instead of the CTS line RTS Request To Send Output logic 0 active With RTS the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data The RTS line controls the instrument s readiness for reception CTS Clear To Send Input logic 0 active CTS informs the instrument that the opposite station is ready to receive data 1104 3430 12 5 28 E 1 SMR Interfaces Transmission Parameters To ensure error free and correct data transmission the transmission parameters on the instrument and the controller must have the same settings The settings are made in the Utilities System RS232 menu Transmission rate Eight different baud rates can be set on the instrument baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Data bits
59. dBm 130 to 25 dBm block data 20 to 25 dBm without SMR B15 B17 POINts query only SELect name of list SOURce LIST CATalog The command requests a survey of the lists available separated by commas The command is a query and hence has no RST value Answer MYLIST LIST1 LIST2 Example SOUR LIST CAT SOURce LIST DELete name of list The command deletes the list indicated RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR LIST DEL LIST2 SOURce LIST DELete ALL The command deletes all lists RST has no influence on data lists Example SOUR LIST DEL ALL 1104 3430 12 6 24 E 1 SMR SOURce LIST SOURce LIST DWELI 1msto1s The command specifies the time the instrument dwells at this item Example SOUR LIST DWEL 0 15 SOURce LIST DWELI POINts The command queries the length in items of the DWELI part of the list The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST DWEL POIN Answer 1 SOURce LIST FREE The command queries two values The first one indicates the space still vacant for lists in items the second one the space already occupied also in items The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST FREE Answer 2000 3 SOURce LIST FREQuency 1 GHz Fass 1 GHZ Fmax Block data Option SMR B11 above 10 MHz The command fills the FREQuency part of the list selected with data The data can e
60. differences e No INIT command the instrument behaves as if INIT CONT ON was set e There are several subsystems denoting the different parts of the instrument under TRIGg SWE LIST PULS MSEQ Further commands as to the trigger system of the SMR can be found in the ABORt system Default Command Parameters Unit Remark TRIGger1 2 SWEep IMMediate No query SOURce SINGIe EXTernal AUTO LIST MMediate No query SOURce SINGIe EXTernal AUTO MSEQuence IMMediate No query SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO PULSe SOURce AUTO trig EXT_trig EXT_GATED SLOPe POSitive NEGative SLOPe POSitive NEGative EITHer TRIGger1 2 SWEep All commands to trigger a sweep are under this node The settings here act on level and frequency sweeps for RF generator TRIG1 or LF generator TRIG2 TRIGger1 2 SWEep MMediate The command immediately starts a sweep Which sweep is executed depends on the respective Mode setting eg SOUR FREQ MODE SWE The command corresponds to manual control command Execute Single Sweep This command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG SWE IMM 1104 3430 12 6 52 E 1 SMR TRIGger TRIGger1 2 SWEep SOURce AUTO SINGle EXTernal The command specifies the trigger source The naming of the parameters directly corresponds to the different settings with manual control SCPI uses other designations for the parameters the in
61. entered with block function FILL in the list editor than the filling range RANGE set permits The exceeding data are ignored 306 No fill pattern specified An attempt was made to execute a filler function without having to indicate a filler pattern 1104 3430 12 9 8 E 1 SMR 10 Index Index This chapter contains the index for the present operating manual A Abort actions Iriogerer nenn 6 6 Active edge external trigger PULSE input eet 4 16 4 24 6 55 TRIGGER Input 6 55 Address IEGHEEE bUS u 32a 5 3 6 47 Addressed commande 5 27 AM COUDIING EE 4 13 6 14 TOQUEN iere 4 13 6 14 Amplitude marker RF ween 4 30 6 27 Amplitude modulation AM 4 13 6 13 ASK MOdU atiOD oooooonocioniconionocaconccnccananccnran cnn narcos 6 18 ASTM ii A eases ener TA 5 12 Attenuation eege Ee E 4 22 6 11 TT 4 4 6 11 Attenuator operating cycles une 4 51 AUX interface caesen 261 9 AUK J 4 54 Auxiliary inputs outputS ueeeenesnesneernennnnnnrnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnn 4 54 B Batiery test RAM ua ae ae ae 4 52 Baud rate De 239 4 44 5 29 6 47 BLANK oO eege ana 4 27 4 35 4 54 Blank signal QUIATION ata hee tebe seas 4 54 Blank EE 6 35 Block ata a esst d tt nennen a eee 5 11 Boolean parameters ennnennnnnnn 5 9 5 10 Brief instructions IEC IEEE bus nnnnnooonnnananaoennnanannonornnannsonnrenenannenrenannne 5 1 Lee 5 2 Brightness Control doschloscope nen
62. frequency range corresponds to the settable frequency range of the instrument The level range is 20 dB If the permissible level range is exceeded the level error increases Table 4 4 List mode typical list Index Frequency Level 0001 2 GHz 0 dBm 0002 10 GHz 13 dBm 0008 15GHz 7dBm 0003 3 GHz 5 dBm loo Up to 10 lists can be created The total number of possible pairs of values including all lists must not exceed 2000 ie a list may have 2000 entries at the most or fewer entries if several lists have been created Each list is assigned a separate name and selected by means of this name A detailed description of the editing function will be found in the section List Editor Operating Modes Mode The following list modes are available Auto Run from the beginning to the end of a list with automatic restart at the beginning If a different mode was active prior to selection of the Auto mode the list run is continued from the current index IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR AUTO Single Single run from the beginning to the end of the list The selection of Single does not start a list run The list run is started by means of the Execute Single List function which is displayed below the Mode line IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR SING Step Step by step manual processing of
63. hardware is set for AM FM und SOURce2 This means that for example the following commands are coupled to each other and have the same effect SOUR AM INT FREO SOUR FM INT FREO SOUR2 FREO CW SOURce AM INTernal FREQuency 0 1Hz to 10 MHz The command sets the modulation frequency Example SOUR AM INT FREQ 15kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce AM SOURce INT EXT1 EXT2 The command selects the modulation source An external and an internal modulation source can be specified atthe same time see example Example SOUR AM SOUR EXT INT RST value is INT SOURce AM SCAN SENSitivity 0 1 to 10 dB V The command sets the scan sensitivity The resolution is 0 01 dB V Example SOUR AM SCAN 0 1dB V SOURce AM SCAN STATe OFF ON The command switches the logarithmic amplitude modulation on or off Example SOUR AM SCAN ON RST value is OFF SOURce AM STATe OFF ON The command switches amplitude modulation on or off Example SOUR AM STAT ON RST value is OFF 1104 3430 12 6 14 E 1 SMR SOURce CORRection SOURce CORRection Subsystem The CORRection subsystem permits a correction of the output level The correction is effected by adding user defined table values to the output level as a function of the RF frequency In the SMR this subsystem serves to select transmit and switch on User Correction tables see Section User Correction Ucor as well Command Parameters Defaul
64. in inverted commas eg SOURce FREQuency MODE FIXed 161 Invalid block data The command contains errored block data Example An END message was received before the expected number of data was received 168 Block data not allowed The command contains valid block data at a position which is not allowed Example The command RCL requires the entry of a number 178 Expression data not allowed 1104 3430 12 The command contains a mathematical expression at a position which is not allowed 9 3 E 1 Error Messages SMR Execution Error error in the execution of a command sets bit 4 in the ESR register Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error 203 Command protected The desired command could not be executed as it is protected by a password Use the command SySTem PROTect OFF lt password gt to enable the desired command Example The command CALibrate PULSe MEASure is password protected 211 Trigger ignored The trigger GET TRG or trigger signal was ignored because of the instrument timing control Example The instrument was not ready to answer 221 Settings conflict The settings of two parameters are conflicting Example FM1 and PM1 cannot be switched on at the same time 222 Data out of range The parameter value is out of the permissible range of the instrument Example The command RCL only permits entries between 0 and 50 The command contains too many data E
65. indicated cf RCL as well SRE 0 to 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the value indicated Bit 6 MSS mask bit remains 0 This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered Query SRE reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always 0 STB READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form TRG TRIGGER triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event Special trigger events can be started by command system TRIGger see section TRIGger System WAI WAIT to CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled cf opc as well 1104 3430 12 6 5 E 1 ABORt SMR ABORt System The ABORt system contains the commands to abort actions triggered After an action has been aborted it can be triggered again at once All commands trigger an event thus they have no RST value Further commands for the trigger system of the SMR can be found in the TRIGger system Command Parameter Default Remark Unit ABORt SWEep No query LIST No query MSEQuence No query ABORt SWEep The command aborts a sweep Example ABOR SWE ABORt LIST The command aborts a list execution Example ABOR LIST ABORt MSEQuence The command aborts a Memory Sequence Example ABOR MSEQ 1104 34
66. is switched on if HIGH level is present at the PULSE modulation input If option SMR B14 is fitted the input impedance can be switched between 50 Q and 10 kQ if the option is not fitted the input impedance is permanently at 50 Q Settings for the pulse modulation and the pulse generator can be made in the Modulation Pulse menu Menu selection Modulation Pulse 10 000 000 0000 ch Fulse Source Pulse Polarity Pulse Period Auto Trig Pos Normal Ext Impedance 10 Kee Back 4 Fig 4 12 Modulation Pulse menu preset setting option SMR B14 pulse generator fitted Pulse Source Selection of modulation source IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR PULM SOUR INT STAT ON Pulse Polarity Selection of polarity of modulation signal Normal The RF signal is on with HIGH level present Inverse The RF signal is suppressed with HIGH level present IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULM POL NORM Pulse Period Input value of pulse period IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS PER 10us Pulse Width Input value of pulse width IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS WIDT ius Pulse Delay Input value of single pulse delay This value is indicated only if Double Pulse State is set to Off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DEL lys 1104 3430 12 4 15 E 1 Analog Modulation Double Pulse State Pulse Mode Ext Trig Slope Gate Input Polarity Ext Impedance Pulse Generator SMR Switching on off double pulse On Double pulse is switched on
67. its operating manual and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the products requires technical skills and knowledge of English It is therefore essential that the products be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Symbols and safety labels l A A A Z ion Observe Weight Danger of Warning Ground En operating indication for electric Hot PE terminal Ground terminal sensitiva instructions units gt 18 kg shock surface devices O NA Se o e Device fully N Standby a Alternating Direct alternating protected by ONICEE indication DC current AC current DC AC double reinforced insulation 1171 0000 42 02 00 Sheet 1 Safety Instructions Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before putting the product into operation It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation In these safety instructions the word product
68. key or rotary knob A pop up menu displays the current 1 out of n selection E 1 SMR Sample Setting for First Users Operating steps Explanantions MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select LF generator as modulation source using rotary knob Gi N The selection mark marks LFGen LFGen SELECT ID i Press SELECT key or rotary knob d Y The cursor is set back to AM Source MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select parameter LFGen Freq using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob EERSnEIS The menu cursor marks the current frequency selection MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Set the frequency of the LF generator to 3 kHz 3k The selection mark marks 3 kHz Press SELECT key or rotary knob The AM modulation setting is completed The indications on the display are represented in Fig 2 1 10 000 000 0000 ch Modulation at AM Depth AM Source Scan State AC 100 Kee 100 Kee 1 0000 kHz sin Fig 2 1 Display for AM setting 1104 3430 12 2 3 E 1 Sample Setting for First Users SMR Setting the step width Subsequently to the above setting 4 2 GHz as new RF frequency and 12 kHz as the step width for the RF frequency variation are set in the following Operating steps Explanations BACK ite back Reset the menu cursor to the main rey L J menu in 3 steps MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select menu Frequency using rotary knob Le Press SELECT
69. konnen 4 9 Modulation General 2 2 uu 22 2022 een aan ann nun SEENEN ann namens 4 10 ModulationSQUICES cc dd td 4 10 Simultaneous Modulation ooooonncccinnccnnncnoncnnnccnnoncccnnrnnn nana cr 4 11 Mutual Switch Off of Modulation Types ooooonccccnccccnnccnnonnnononnnnncccnnn cnn anna nano cn nan n cnn nn nann ranma 4 11 MOD ON OFF Ke y iio 4 12 Analog Modulation 2 2 2 22222 O 4 13 Amplituds Modulatio 2er a 4 13 Frequency Modulation iscuriti A iaa nano cnn rre N E nan nn nece cnn 4 14 Pulse Modulation rrenen aniier eranan Ea Ai 4 15 AEAEE e TE E 4 16 LEONOR a EE EEEE EEA EEE SEENE ES 4 18 Digital Modulations ASK and FSK uuuuesusnnannnnannnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnn 4 19 LF Output A anurun annnnnnnn unnn annnnnnnnnnnnananannna menena anneanne nea 4 21 EIDEN 4 22 PULSE VIDEO Oufput 202 Vase SEENEN eege dran hen 4 23 SWCD E 4 25 Setting the Sweep Range Start Freq Stop Freq Center Freq Span ueen 4 25 Selecting Linear Logarithmic Sweep Lin Log Spacing 24u4n400nnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 26 Operating Modes Mode 4 26 e Blad 4 27 SIE DU e ee eher 4 27 RES Wei iin IHRE 4 29 RE A Eee 4 31 A DEE EE 4 32 LIS EMO de EEN 4 34 Operating Modes Mode 4 34 E O O Or 4 35 Memory Sequence ii id 4 38 Operating Modes M d Jandera a ep EENS 4 38 External TIN iria 4 39 du 4 42 Display EE 4 42 SYSIE
70. list Activating Step stops a running list and the cursor moves to the value indicated for Current Index The list can now be scrolled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob or the numeric keys IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE STEP TRIG LIST SOUR SING 1104 3430 12 4 34 E 1 SMR List Mode Ext Single Single list run from the beginning to the end of the list as with Single but triggered by an external signal IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO TRIG LIST SOUR EXT Ext Step Step by step run controlled by an external trigger signal Each trigger event triggers a single step IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE STEP TRIG LIST SOUR EXT Off Switching off of list mode IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ MODE CW Inputs Outputs The TRIG STOP input BLANK output and the MARKER output at the rear of the instrument are available for synchronization with other instruments and units TRIG STOP An external signal at this input triggers the list mode in the Ext Single and Ext Step operating modes BLANK This output supplies a signal 0 V 5 V for blanking the transient response by means of pulse modulation or AM The signal can also be used to synchronize other instruments MARKER This output supplies a trigger signal immediately after blanking at the first step
71. menu Settings for the memory sequence mode can be made in the MemSeq menu 1104 3430 12 4 39 E 1 Memory Sequence SMR Menu selection MemSeq 10 0000000000 ch om Reset List Curent Index Geo Insert Fig 4 29 MemSeq menu preset setting Mode Selection of operating mode setting the operating mode affects several command systems on the IEC IEEE bus see above Exec Single Starts a single memory sequence run This menu option is visible only if Mode Sequence Single is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG MSEQ Reset List Return to the beginning of the list IEC IEEE bus command ABOR MSEQ Current Index Display of current list index In Step mode setting value of current list index Select List Selection of a list or creation of a new list cf Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SYST MSEQ SEL MSEQ1 Delete List Deletion of a list cf Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SYST MSEQ DEL MSEQ2 Edit List Selection of editor function for editing a list cf Chapter 3 Section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SYST MSEQ 9 2 DWEL 50ms 50ms Note When lists are edited in the Memory Sequence mode parameters Memory and Dwell are displayed instead of parameters Frequency and Power presented in the example of List mode Chapter 3 Section List Editor 1104 3430 12 4 40 E 1 SMR Memory Sequence The se
72. of the new value or minus sign The old value is deleted the entry is indicated in the marked field gt Enter further digits gt Terminate the input using a unit key or in the case of inputs in the base unit or in the case of inputs without unit using the 1x Enter key gt Press BACK key or mark selection BACK using rotary knob and then press rotary knob The menu cursor wraps back to the appropriate parameter gt Set the digit cursor bright field to the position of the setting value to be varied using keys gt gt Turn rotary knob The value is varied in steps of 1 Note RF frequency and RF level can also be varied in a step width which can be defined arbitrarily using the rotary knob In the respective setting menu Frequency or Level the step width is entered as Knob Step User and the Knob Step set from Decimal to User To point to the fact that the step width has been converted to the value programmed the bright field as a symbol of the digit cursor disappears in the respective value indication 3 3 E 1 Basic Operating Steps SMR 1 out of n selection gt Select parameter gt Press SELECT key or rotary knob A pop up menu displays a selection of settings gt Set the menu cursor to the position desired within the 1 out of n selection using the rotary knob or cursor keys lt gt gt Press SELECT key or rotary knob The setting is made The pop up menu is closed and the cu
73. product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves Handles on the products are designed exclusively for personnel to hold or carry the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles for fastening the product to or on means of transport such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport and for observing the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle The driver is always responsible for the safety of the vehicle the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated in a Rohde amp Schwarz product do not use any other settings or functions than those described in the documentation Otherwise this may be hazardous to your health since the laser beam can c
74. que los productos que son instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin protector implementado autointerruptor o similares objetos de protecci n deber la toma de corriente estar protegida de manera que los productos o los usuarios est n suficientemente protegidos Por favor no introduzca ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello en los orificios de la caja del aparato No vierta nunca ninguna clase de l quidos sobre o en la caja Esto puede producir corto circuitos en el producto y o puede causar golpes de corriente fuego o heridas Aseg rese con la protecci n adecuada de que no pueda originarse en el producto una sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una tormenta Si no se ver el personal que lo utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de corriente Los productos R amp S no est n protegidos contra el agua si no es que exista otra indicaci n ver tambi n punto 1 Si no se tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de golpe de corriente o de da os en el producto lo cual tambi n puede llevar al peligro de personas No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las que pueda producirse y se hayan producido l quidos de condensaci n en o dentro del producto como por ejemplo cuando se desplaza el producto de un lugar fr o a un lugar caliente Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio del producto ya que estas son necesarias para la ventilaci n e impiden que el producto se caliente demasiado No pongan el product
75. separate IBWRT call To prevent overlapping execution of commands one of commands OPC OPC or WAI has to be used Each of the three commands causes a certain action to be triggered only after the hardware has been set and has settled The controller can be programmed to wait for the respective action to occur see Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Synchronization by means of OPC OPC and WAI Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming of controller OPC Sets the operation complete bits in the ESR Setting of bit 0 in the ESE Setting of bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for a service request SRQ OPC Writes a 1 into the output buffer Addressing of instrument as a talker Sending of next command The handshake is not stopped WAI Continues the IEC IEEE bus handshake An example of command synchronization will be found in section 7 Programming Examples 1104 3430 12 5 15 E 1 Status Reporting System SMR Status Reporting System The status reporting system see Fig 5 4 stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument for example on any errors that have occurred This information is stored in status registers and in an error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via the IEC IEEE bus The information is of a hierarchical structure The highest level is formed by the status byte STB register defined in IEEE 488 2 and the associated ser
76. superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptas para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras por ejemplo paredes y estantes 1171 0000 42 02 00 31 32 33 Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el manejo que solamente est previsto para personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujecion en o sobre medios de transporte como por ejemplo gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc El usuario es responsable de que los productos sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios de transporte y de que las prescripciones de seguridad del fabricante de los medios de transporte sean tenidas en cuenta En caso de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden causarse da os en personas y objetos Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un veh culo queda en la responsabilidad absoluta del conductor que conducir el veh culo de manera segura Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente las lesiones u otra clase de da os No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Siempre queda en la responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la seguridad del veh culo y el fabricante no asumir ninguna clase de responsabilidad por accidentes o colis
77. the data source reduces the amplitude a 1 increases it INVerted A 1 from the data source reduces the amplitude a 0 increases it Example SOUR DM ASK POL INV RST value is NORM SOURce DM FSK The commands to set the data source for the digital frequency modulation are under this node SOURce DM FSK DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz This command sets the frequency deviation of the FSK modulation The maximum deviation possible depends on the selected frequency see Data Sheet Example SOUR DM FSK DEV 3kHz RST value is 10 kHz SOURce DM FSK POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the modulation NORMal Logical 0 reduces the frequency logical 1 increases it INVerted Logical 1 reduces the frequency logical 0 increases it Example SOUR DM FSK POL INV RST value is NORM 1104 3430 12 6 18 E 1 SMR SOURce FM SOURce FM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the frequency modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce FM Option SMR B5 DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz Hz EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm Ohm INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz Hz SOURce INT EXT1 EXT2 STATe ON OFF SOURce FM DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz The command specifies the frequency variation caused by the FM The maximum possible deviation depends on the selected frequen
78. the subsequent unit see Fig 4 4 The level of the RF output signal is therefore calculated from the amplitude and offset entered in the Level Level menu as follows RF output level amplitude offset The entered offset has no influence on the RF output signal of the SMR the offset is only taken into account in the displayed level value The value with the offset can be directly entered with the LEVEL key The RF output level of the SMR is indicated in the Level Level menu Input value Offset y SMR gt Attenuator gt Amplifier RF output level Value displayed Fig 4 4 Typical setup with level offset Non Interrupting Level Setting With option SMR B15 20 GHz attenuator SMR20 SMR27 or SMR B17 40 GHz attenuator SMR30 SMR40 With Attenuator Mode Fixed non interrupting level setting is performed Electronic attenuator switching is used instead of interrupting mechanical attenuator switching If the level falls below the permissible variation range the warning Level underrange is output in the status line of the display if it attains or goes beyond the upper limit value the warning Unleveled is output With underrange or overrange level accuracy and spectral purity are no longer guaranteed 1104 3430 12 4 5 E 1 RF Level Switching On Off Automatic Level Control Alc Settings for automatic level control ALC can be made in the Level Alc menu SMR When level
79. triggering the pulse generator In the trigger mode Ext Gated the pulse generator is triggered as long as an active Gate signal arrives at the PULSE input The pulse generator can also be used as an independent unit ie without the pulse modulator being controlled if the pulse modulation source Pulse Source is switched to OFF or EXT The pulse can be tapped at the VIDEO output 1104 3430 12 4 16 E 1 SMR SYNC signal VIDEO signal RF signal Fig 4 13 PULSE input SYNC signal VIDEO signal RF signal Fig 4 14 PULSE input SYNC signal VIDEO signal RF signal Fig 4 15 Analog Modulation e PERIOD PULSE DELAY WIDTH gt PULSE DELAY Fis WIDTH 7 Signal example 1 single pulse Pulse mode Auto Trig gt TRIGGER DELAY 4 DOUBLE PULSE DELAY m a WIDTH gt E WIDTH i Signal example 2 double pulse Pulse mode Ext Trig Slope Pos a rt PULSE DELAY k WIDTH gt PULSE DELAY WIDTH PERIOD E Signal example 3 single pulse Pulse Mode Ext Gated 1104 3430 12 4 17 E 1 Analog Modulation SMR LF Generator The LF generator is part of the option SMR B5 and therefore available only if option SMR B5 is fitted The waveforms and frequencies of internal modulation signals can be selected in one of the modulation menus AM FM or in the LF Output
80. used The MOD ON OFF key can be effective either for all types of modulation or only for a selected modulation The selection of modulation types for which the MOD ON OFF key is to be effective is made in the Utilities Mod Key menu If only one type of modulation is selected it is switched on or off each time the MOD ON OFF key is pressed If all modulation types are selected the MOD ON OFF key has the following effect e If at least one modulation type is active Pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches off all active modulation types The modulation types which were active are stored e f no modulation type is active Pressing the MOD ON OFF key switches on the modulation types that were last switched off with this key 1104 3430 12 4 12 E 1 SMR Analog Modulation Analog Modulation Amplitude Modulation Settings for linear and logarithmic amplitude modulation can be made in the Modulation AM menu Note The maximum guaranteed level of the SMR varies depending on the model and the options fitted see data sheet The specified AM data are valid only up to 6 dB below the maximum level in each case For level values exceeding this threshold AM data are guaranteed only if the modulation depth is decreases linearly Ifthe set modulation depth is too large WARNING is output in the status line and after pressing the ERROR key the message WARN 221 Settings conflict modulation forces peak level into overran
81. via RS 232 C Interface 5 4 Setting the Transmission Parameters nenn 5 4 Indications during Remote Control 5 4 Return to Manual Operation 5 4 E EE 5 5 Interface Mess gest EE 5 5 Device Messages Commands and Device Responses snnersnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 5 5 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages nuunuasnnnnaannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnannnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnn ann 5 6 Introduction tee AE 5 6 Structure of Commande nn 5 6 Structure of Command Lines nn 5 9 Responses to QUEME a rer eege e ee ee ee Ee 5 9 NEE 5 10 Overview of Syntax Elements 5 12 Instrument Model and Command Processing unusssnsnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen nennen 5 13 DUOC ln EE 5 13 Command Recognitions araeir eaa cnn canon 5 14 Data Set and Instrument Hardware oooonocccinnccnncccnoncononnnnnannnoncc cnn cnn nn 5 14 Status Reporting System cccccesceceeeeeeeneeeesaeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaesdeaeeeeeeeesaaesseaaeseeeeeseaeeseaeseeneeeeeeees 5 14 Output Unit ra nen ln aa 5 15 Command Sequence and Command Gvnchronlzation crac 5 15 Status Reporting System unsuuunsannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnan anne 5 16 Structure of an SCPI Status Register nen 5 16 Overview of Status Registers nen 5 18 1104 3430 12 5 E 1 Contents SMR Description of Status Registers ccceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeseceeeseeeeesaeeeeaaesene
82. yes yes registers Clears ENABle parts of all yes yes OPERation and QUESTionable registers fills ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 Fills PTRansition parts yes yes with 1 clears NTRansition parts Clears error queue yes yes yes Clears output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clears command yes yes yes processing and input buffer 1 Each command which is the first in a command line ie which directly follows the lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATORs clears the output buffer 1104 3430 12 5 24 E 1 SMR Interfaces Interfaces IEC IEEE Bus Interface The instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus interface as standard The connector to IEEE 488 is provided at the rear of the instrument A controller for remote control can be connected via the interface Connection is made using a shielded cable Characteristics of Interface e 8 bit parallel data transmission e Bidirectional data transmission Three wire handshake e High data transmission rate max 350 kbyte s e Up to 15 devices can be connected Maximum length of connecting cables 15 m single connection 2 m e Wired OR if several instruments are connected in parallel ATN IFC NRFD EOI DIO3 DIO1 shield logic GND GND 10 6 REN DIO7 GND 11 GND 9 GND 7 DIO8 DIO6 DIO5 Fig 5 5 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE bus interface Bus Lines 1 Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1
83. 0 s The list is organized in three columns for the index memory location number Memory and dwell The list starts with the index 001 Table 4 5 Memory sequence example of list Index Memory Dwell 001 09 50 0 ms 002 02 50 0 ms 003 01 75 0 ms 004 10 75 0 ms Up to 10 sequence lists can be created The total number of possible list elements must not exceed 256 ie a list may have 256 entries at the most or fewer entries if several lists have been created Each list is assigned a separate name and selected by means of this name A detailed description the editing function will be found in Chapter 3 Section List Editor Note Frequent level changes in the memory sequence mode may stress the mechanically switched attenuator The attenuator is actuated when AM is switched on or off for example For this reason we recommend that you use non interrupting level setting as far as possible or use the setting AM 0 instead of switching AM off Operating Modes Mode The following operating modes are available Auto Run from the beginning to the end of the list with automatic restart at the beginning If a different mode was active prior to selection of the Auto mode the list run is continued from the current index IEC IEEE bus commands SYST MODE MSEQ SYST MSEQ MODE AU TRIG MSEQ SOUR AUT oo 1104 3430 12 4 38 E 1 SMR Single Step Ext Single Ext Step Off
84. 30 12 6 6 E 1 SMR DIAGnostic DIAGnostic System The DIAGnostic system contains the commands for diagnostic test and service of the instrument SCPI does not define DIAGnostic commands the commands listed here are SMR specific All DIAGnostic Commande are queries which are not influenced by RST Hence no default setting values are stated Command Parameter Default Remark Unit DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt ATTenuator1 2 3 4 Query only POWer Query only MODules Query only OTIMe Query only SDATe Query only MEASure POINt Query only DIAGnostic INFO The commands which can be used to query all information which does not require hardware measurement are under this node DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt The commands which can be used to query all counters in the instrument are under this node Cycle COunt DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt ATTenuator1 2 3 4 The command queries the number of switching processes of the different attenuator stages The stages are designated with Z1 to Z4 within the instrument In this command they are differentiated by a numeric suffix whose name corresponds to the number Suffix Name Function 1 Z1 10 dB stage 2 Z2 20 dB stage 3 Z3 40 dB stage 4 Z4 40 dB stage Example DIAG INFO CCO ATT1 Response 1487 DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt POWer The command queries the number of switch on processes Example DIAG INFO CCO POW Response 258 1104 3430 12 6 7 E 1 DIAGnos
85. 310 System error This error message suggests an error within the instrument Please inform your R amp S service center 311 Memory error Error in instrument memory 313 Calibration memory lost Loss of stored calibration data The YFOM and ALC AMP calibration data can be restored by means of internal routines see chapter 2 section Calibration 314 Save recall memory lost Loss of the nonvolatile data stored with the command SAV 315 Configuration memory lost Loss of the nonvolatile configuration data stored by the instrument 330 Self test failed The self test could not be executed 350 Queue overflow This error code is entered into the error queue instead of the actual error code when the error queue is full The code indicates that an error has occurred but has not been accepted The error queue can accept 5 entries 360 Communication error An error has occurred during the transmission or reception of data on the IEC IEEE bus or via the RS 232 C interface Query Error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error Query INTERRUPTED The query was interrupted Example After a query the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely 410 The query is incomplete Example The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data Query DEADLOCKED The query cannot be processed Example
86. 34 93 415 15 68 Fax 34 93 237 49 95 ben rses rohde schwarz com el 94 112 90 80 01 Fax 94 112 91 04 69 69 dynatel dynanet lk Tel 249 183 47 31 08 Fax 249 183 47 31 38 solarman29 hotmail com Tel 46 8 605 19 00 Fax 46 8 605 19 80 info rss rohde schwarz com Tel 41 31 922 15 22 Fax 41 31 921 81 01 support roschi rohde schwarz com Tel 963 11 231 59 74 Fax 963 11 231 88 75 memo hamshointl com Adressen Addresses Taiwan Tanzania Thailand Trinidad amp Tobago Tunisia Turkey Ukraine United Arab Emirates United Kingdom Rohde amp Schwarz Taiwan Pvt Ltd Floor 14 No 13 Sec 2 Pei Tou Road aipei 112 cel SSTL Group P O Box 7512 Dunga Street Plot 343 345 Dar Es Salaam Rohde amp Schwarz International Thailand 2nd floor Gems Tower Bangrak Suriyawong Bangkok 10600 Schmidt Electronics Thailand Ltd esstechnik 202 Le Concorede Tower 23rd Fl Ratchadaphisek Rd Huay kwang Bangkok 10320 PP Operation Co Ltd ommunikationstechnik 41 5 Mooban Tarinee Boromrajchonnee Road alingchan Bangkok 10170 siehe see Mexico eletek 71 Rue Alain Savary Residence Alain Savary C64 Cit el Khadra 1003 Tunis Rohde amp Schwarz International GmbH Liaison Office Istanbul Bagdat Cad 191 3 Arda Apt B Blok 81030 Selamicesme Istanbul Rohde amp Schwarz Representative Office Kiev 4 Patris Lou
87. 4 9 Modulation AM menu preset Setting 4 13 Modulation FM menu preset setting ocoonoccccnonncicininocccnnnnocnncnanannnn nana nme ernennen 4 14 Modulation Pulse menu preset seitng 444er nnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnennn nn nnnn nen 4 15 Signal example 1 single pulse Pulse mode Auto Trig oooonocccnnncccccconcnncnonannnnnnnnos 4 17 Signal example 2 double pulse Pulse mode Ext Trig Slope POS oooooccnnoncccca 4 17 Signal example 3 single pulse Pulse Mode Ext Gate 4 17 Digital Mod Ask menu preset Setting 4 19 Digital Mod Fsk menu preset Setting 4 20 LfOutput menu preset setting 24444440nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnn nen 4 21 IFInput menu preset setting nuusrsnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennn nenn 4 22 STE e lee 4 23 Example of E E TEE 4 28 Example of E RE TEE 4 29 Sweep Freq Menu el 4 29 sweep Level menu nun 4 31 Sweep Lfgen men 4 32 9 E 1 Contents SMR Fig 4 26 Example of signal in list mode Mode Ext Gienp 4 35 Fig 4 27 List ul ae en nn 4 36 Fig 4 28 List menu selection WINKOW nn mann 4 37 Fig 4 29 Mem Geo menu preset Setting 4 40 Fig 4 30 Mem Geo menu selection window cnc canoa nana cnn nc ccnncns 4 41 Fig 4 31 Ur En UE 4 42 Fig 4 32 e RETTEN 4 42 Fig 4 33 Utilities System Mens eet ehren aiae aaa aaa a ie 4 42 Fig 4 34 Utilities System GPIB Address menu 4 43 Fig 4
88. 40264 D 53057 Bonn Zweigniederlassung Nord Gesch ftsstelle Hamburg Vierenkamp 6 D 22423 Hamburg ln Postfach 900 149 D 51111 K ln nchen rnberg Donaustra e 36 D 90451 N rnberg eu Isenburg iederkasseler Stra e 33 D 51147 K ln Zweigniederlassung S d Gesch ftsstelle hldorfstra e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen Zweigniederlassung S d Gesch ftsstelle Zweigniederlassung Mitte Gesch ftsstelle Tel 49 228 918 90 0 Fax 49 228 25 50 87 info rsv rohde schwarz com Tel 49 40 38 61 83 00 Fax 49 40 38 61 83 20 info rsv rohde schwarz com Zweigniederlassung Mitte Gesch ftsstelle Tel 49 2203 807 0 Fax 49 2203 807 650 info rsv rohde schwarz com Tel 49 89 41 86 95 0 Fax 49 89 40 47 64 info rsv rohde schwarz com Tel 49 911 642 03 0 Fax 49 911 642 03 33 info rsv rohde schwarz com Tel 49 6102 20 07 0 Fax 49 6102 20 07 12 Siemensstra e 20 D 63263 Neu Isenburg info rsv rohde schwarz com Postfach 1651 D 63236 Neu Isenburg Kop Engineering Ltd P O Box 11012 3rd Floor Akai House Osu Accra North Mercury S A 6 Loukianou Str 10675 Athens siehe see Mexico siehe see Mexico siehe see Mexico siehe see Mexico Electronic Scientific Engineering 9 F North Somerset House Taikoo Place 979 King s Road Quarry Bay Hong Kong Rohde amp Schwarz Budapesti Iroda Vaci
89. AD generator 20 Transfer new address to controller Indications during Remote Control The remote control state is indicated by IEC Remote or Local being displayed on the STATUS page In the REMOTE state the STATUS page is always displayed Locked indicates that the LOCAL key is disabled ie switchover to manual control can only be made via the IEC IEEE bus If Unlocked is displayed switchover to manual control can be made with the LOCAL key 1104 3430 12 5 3 E 1 Switchover to Remote Control SMR Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation can be made via the front panel or the IEC IEEE bus Manually gt Press LOCAL key Note Before switchover command processing must be completed as otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO in order to prevent unintentional switchover In this case switchover to manual control is only possible via the IEC IEEE bus The LOCAL key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN control line of the IEC IEEE bus Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBLOC generator Set instrument to manual control Remote Control via RS 232 C Interface Setting the Transmission Parameters To enable error free and correct data transmission the parameters of the instrument and the controller should have the same setting To prevent any problems during binary data transmission the RS
90. AM Request setting of modulation depth CALL IBRD generator AMmodulationdepth Read value AMfrequency SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator AM INT FREQ Request setting of modulation frequency CALL IBRD generator AMfrequency Read value Stepwidth SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator FREQ STEP Request step width setting CALL IBRD generator Stepwidth Read value REM Display values on the screen PRINT RF frequency RFfrequencyS PRINT RF level RFlevelS PRINT AM modulationdepth AMmodulationdepth PRINT AM frequency AMfrequenzs PRINT Step width stepwidth REM XK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk KK KH KKK KKK KKK 104 3430 12 7 2 E 1 SMR Programming Examples List Management REM CALL EE Example of lis IBWRT generators CALL IBWRT generators CALL IBWRT generators CALL CALL IBWRT generators CALL IBWRT generators IBWRT generators t management LIST SELECT CHRS 34 LIST1 CHRS 34 Select list LIST POWER LIST1 is generated if necessary 30715 10 397 050 1 Fill power list with v
91. Ble bit is set to 1 If the bit is set this indicates a questionable instrument status which can be determined in greater detail by polling the QUEStionable status register 4 MAV bit Message AVailable This bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read The bit can be used for the automatic reading of data from the instrument to the controller see chapter 7 Programming Examples 5 ESB bit Sum bit of event status register It is set if one of the bits of the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register If the bit is set this indicates a serious error which can be determined in greater detail by polling the event status register 6 MSS bit Master Status Summary bit This bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable SRE register 7 OPERation Status Register sum bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 If the bit is set this indicates that the instrument is just carrying out an action The type of action can be determined by polling the OPERation status register 1104 3430 12 5 19 E 1 Status Reporting System SMR IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE Analogously with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status informatio
92. CALL IBWRT generator STATus OPERation EVENt CALL IBRD generator Oper IF VAL Oper AND 1 gt 0 HEN PRINT Calibration IF VAL Oper AND 2 gt O THEN PRINT Settling IF VAL Oper AND 8 gt O THEN PRINT Sweeping IF VAL Oper AND 32 gt 0 THEN PRINT Wait for trigger RETURN Esrread Read Event status register Esr SPACES 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL IBWRT generator ESR Read ESR CALL IBRD generator Esr IF VAL Esr AND 1 gt 0 THEN PRINT Operation complete IF VAL Esr AND 4 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 8 gt O THEN PRINT Device dependent error IF VAL Esr AND 16 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 32 gt 0 THEN GOTO Failure IF VAL Esr AND 64 gt 0 THEN PRINT User request IF VAL Esr AND 128 gt 0 THEN PRINT Power on RE TURN Oe ee ee ee ee ee ee HH HH HH HH HH KH KH HH HH HH HH ee ee ee REM Error routin Error handling PRINT ERROR Output error message STOP Stop software 1104 3430 12 7 5 E 1 Programming Examples SMR Operating the Generator in the IEC Bus Controller Mode Initializations ATTENTION Specify your own addresses here pcadr 0 enter IEC bus address of the PC gen_adr S 28 enter IEC bus
93. CPI 6 50 1104 3430 12 List of Commande SMR Command Parameter SCPI info Page TEST ASSy Module Subaddress Hex string 6 51 l TEST RAM TEST ROM 6 51 6 51 TEST BATTery 6 51 TRIGger1 2 SWEep IMMediate not SCPI 6 52 TRIGger1 2 SWEep SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal not SCPI 6 53 TRIGger LIST IMMediate not sch 6 53 TRIGger LIST SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal not SCPI 6 54 TRIGger MSEQuence lMMediate Inotscp 6 54 TRIGger MSEQuence SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO not SCPI 6 54 TRIGger PULSe SOURce AUTO _trig EXT_trig EXT_GATED not SCPI 6 55 TRIGger PULSe SLOPe POSitive NEGative not SCPI 6 55 TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative ElTHer 1104 3430 12 6 60 notSCPI 6 55 E 1 SMR Programming Examples 7 Remote Control Programming Examples The examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more complex programming tasks QuickBASIC has been used as programming language However the programs can be translated into other languages Including IEC Bus Library for QuickBasic REM Include IEC bus library for quickbasic SINCLUDE c gbasic gbdecl4 bas Initialization and Default Status The IEC bus as well as the settings of the instrument are brought into a defined default status at the beginning of every program Sub
94. Data transmission is in 8 bit ASCII code The LSB least significant bit is transmitted as the first bit Start bit The transmission of a data byte is initiated with a start bit The falling edge of the start bit indicates the beginning of the data byte Parity bit No parity bit is used Stop bit The transmission of a data byte is terminated by a stop bit Example Transmission of character A 41 hex in 8 bit ASCII code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Bit 01 start bit Bits 02 to 09 data bits Bit 10 stop bit Bit duration 1 baud rate Interface Functions For interface control a number of control characters defined from 0 to 20 hex of the ASCII code can be transmitted via the interface Table 5 8 Control characters for RS 232 C interface Control character Function lt Ctrl Q gt 11 hex Enable character output XON lt Ctrl S gt 13 hex Stop character output XOFF Break at least 1 character logic 0 Reset instrument ODhex OAhex Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt Local remote switchover 1104 3430 12 5 29 E 1 Interfaces SMR Handshake Software handshake The software handshake with the XON XOFF protocol controls data transmission If the receiver instrument wishes to inhibit the input of data it sends XOFF to the transmitter The transmitter then interrupts data output until it receives XON from the receiver The same function is also provided at the transmitter end controller Note
95. Deviation Input value of deviation for FSK IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM FSK DEV 10kHz Ext Impedance Selection of input impedance for external input IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM EXT IMP 100kOhm Polarity Selection of polarity of modulation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM FSK POL NORM 1104 3430 12 4 20 E 1 SMR LF Output LF Output The internal LF generator is available as a signal source for the LF output provided the SMR is fitted with the option SMR B5 Settings for the LF output can be made in the LfOutput menu Note Any change to the waveform or frequency of the internal modulation generator in the LfOutput menu also affects the modulation for which the generator has been selected as a modulation source The sweep function of the LF generator can be activated in the Sweep Lfgen menu The unit for the display setting of the LF output voltage can be switched to dBu by means of the G n dBu key Menu selection LfOutput 10 0000000000 ch State Off Voltage Ligen Freq 1 000 te 1 0000 kHz Ligen Shape Back 4 Fig 4 18 _ LfOutput menu preset setting option SMR B5 fitted State Switching on off LF output This parameter has no effect on the modulation settings IEC IEEE bus command OUTP2 ON Voltage Input value of output voltage of LF output A peak voltage is to be entered here If no LF generator option is fitted the constant output voltage of the standard generator Vp 1 V is indicated IEC IE
96. EE bus command OUTP2 VOLT 1V Lfgen Freq Input value of frequency of internal modulation generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM INT FREQ 15kHz Lfgen Shape Input value of waveform of modulation generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FUNC SIN 1104 3430 12 4 21 E 1 IF Input SMR IF Input The SMR offers upconversion of digitally modulated signals up to 40 GHz by means of the IF input Option SMR B23 SMR B24 Menu selection IFInput 10 000 000 000 0 ch RF Attentator Back A Fig 4 19 IFinput menu preset setting option SMR B23 SMR B24 fitted Mode Switching on off IF input IEC IEEE bus command INP IF STAT ON RF Attenuator Attenuation setting in 10 dB steps maximum value is 110 dB Only with Option SMR B15 SMR B17 IEC IEEE bus command OUTP ATT 20 dB 1104 3430 12 4 22 E 1 SMR PULSE VIDEO Output PULSE VIDEO Output The pulse generator output or video output is only available with Option SMR B14 pulse generator cf Section Pulse Generator Menu selection PulseOutput 10 0000000000 ch PulseOutput Om MHormal 10 00 us 1 00 us 1 00 us Double Pulse State CF Auto Trig Ext Trig Slope Fos Gate Input Polarity Normal Ext Impedance 10 Kee Back e Pulse Polarit Pulse Ferio Fig 4 20 PulseOutput menu Source Switching on off pulse source Off Pulsegen or Video can be selected IEC IEEE bus command OUTP SOUR OFF Pulse Polarity Selection of polarity of pulse signa
97. EQ the instrument states stated in the list selected are set successively for the time stated in the time list in each case SYSTem MSEQuence CATalog The command queries the memory sequences available It returns a list the entries are separated by means of commas Example SYST MSEO CAT Answer SEQ1 DEMO SEQA SYSTem MSEQuence DELete Sequence name The command deletes the memory sequence indicated Example SYST MSEQ DEL SEQ1 SYSTem MSEQuence DELete ALL The command deletes all memory sequences The memory sequence mode must be switched off as a selected sequence cannot be deleted SYST MODE FIX Example SYST MSEQ DEL ALL 1104 3430 12 6 48 E 1 SMR SYSTem SYSTem MSEQuence DWELI 50 ms to 60 s 50 ms to 60 s For the memory sequence which has currently been selected the command transmits a list indicating the time for which an instrument setting is held in each case before the instrument proceeds to the next setting If DWELI indicates only one parameter every item of the instrument state list is set for the same indicated time Lists are not influenced by RST Example SYST MSEQ DWEL 1s SYSTem MSEQuence FREE The command queries the space available for memory sequences It returns two values The first value indicates the space still vacant the second the space already occupied Example SYST MSEQ FREE Answer 20 236
98. EVEL keys In the case of a frequency or level input by means of the FREQ or LEVEL keys pressing the FREQ and or LEVEL key again deletes the entire input 1104 3430 12 3 6 E 1 SMR List Editor List Editor The SMR offers the facility of generating lists for automatic sequences list mode memory sequence or for user defined level correction Ucor The lists consist of elements pairs of values which are defined by an index and at least one parameter per index Each list is assigned a separate name and selected by means of this name Access to the lists is made in the associated menus For example sequences of frequency and level value pairs can be accessed in the List menu How to generate and edit lists is explained in detail in this section by the example of the List mode List menu see Fig 3 3 Menu selection List 10 000 000 0000 ch OF Reset List Curent Index Geo Insert Fig 3 3 List menu The settings for Mode Reset List Current Index etc are not relevant for the general description of the list editor They are described in greater detail in chapter 4 in section List Mode The Select List Delete List and Edit List lines are always displayed They are intended for the selection and deletion of lists and for the calling of editing functions Select List Opens a window in which a list out of 10 lists can be selected In this line the currently active list is displayed see section Select List De
99. Editor IEC IEEE bus command SOUR LIST FREQ 100MHz 1 2GHz POW OdBm 6dBm 1104 3430 12 4 36 E 1 SMR List Mode The selection window of the List menu opens automatically if one of the editor functions of the Edit List line Insert Fill Edit View Delete is selected The list indicated in the Select List line is displayed 11 000000 0000 cul 20 0 dem EXA List Edit 10 0000000000 GHz 0002 11 0000000000 GHz 0003 120000000000 GHz Fig 4 28 List menu selection window List Indication of item number of list Free Available space Free 1989 for example means that there is free space for a total of 1989 pairs of values elements in the list memory Len Occupied space Len 0011 for example means that the current list occupies 11 elements in the list memory 1104 3430 12 4 37 E 1 Memory Sequence SMR Memory Sequence In the memory sequence mode the instrument automatically processes a list with stored instrument settings Memory locations 1 to 50 are available to which settings are stored with Save Stored settings are called either separately using Recall or automatically and one after the other in the memory sequence mode The list is continuously processed from the beginning to the end with consecutive indexes The order of processed memory locations is arbitrary Each setting can be assigned a selectable dwell The dwell determines the duration of the setting its minimum value is 50 ms its maximum value 6
100. Error Messages and Chapter 6 Remote Control Exit the menus using the BACK key 1 7 E 1 Front Panel 1104 0002 02 DATA INPUT SMR 02 Digital Mod Sweep 20 0 dem Help SIGNAL GENERATOR 10MHz 20GHz Modulation Utilities Pulse Output IF Input Level Mem Seq QUICK SELECT 10 000 000 0000 cz LF Output List gt ROHDE amp SCHWARZ A lt 4 Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1104 3430 12 10 SMR 9 QUICK SELECT ae E The menu quick selection keys permit fast access to two menus selected ASSIGN Stores the current menu as menu when the MENU1 key is pressed afterwards or as menu2 when the MENU2 key is pressed afterwards MENU1 Activates menu stored MENU2 Activates menu2 stored gt Cf Chapter 3 Section Quick Selection of Menu QUICK SELECT 10 ON OFF SWITCH o dal The On Off switch switches the instrument on I or off O For this it is necessary that the power supply switch on the rear of the instrument be set to On gt Cf Chapter 1 Section Switching On Off the Instrument 1 8 E 1 SMR Elements of the Rear Panel F1 F2 1EC127 T25H 250 AUTOMATICPOWERSELECTION INPUT 100 120 V 200 240V 50 60Hz 240VA P e o 2 ET CG EXT2 amp Fig 1 2 Rear panel view 1104 3430 12 Rear Panel REF REG LF Output LF signal of the internal LF generator
101. Explanation of Front and Rear Panel unsnnssnnennnsennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnennnnannennnan nennen nnana a 1 4 Elements of the Front Panel 1 4 Elements of the Rear Panel 1 9 2 Short ROT EE 2 1 Sample Setting for First Users uunsunssnnnnsnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 2 1 3 Manual Operation 3 1 Besign ofthe DiSplay 22 es loan 3 1 Basic Operating StepsS 4 4 2 4 SEENEN a ern nnen nn rn ka ENEE 3 2 Gallino MEMES e E Ea aS 3 2 Selection and Change of Parametere 3 3 Quick Selection of Menu QUICK SEL ECT 3 4 Use of FREQ and LEVEL KeyS i a a aaa aaa aaa i aaa a 3 5 Use of RF ON OFF and MOD ONOEFT mann 3 5 Changing Unit of kevelet een HH Ein tada 3 5 Correction Of TEE 3 6 List EdHOT errana A ii 3 7 Delect E EE 3 8 Delete List art ae ee an eevee ea 3 8 Edit BEE 3 9 SAVE RECALL Storing Calling of Instrument Settings ccsecceescesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeees 3 14 AAA aar a aeaa aaa paaa aa ea aaa a Ee a Aaa Aaaa aaae raaa Aaaa a e aAa aa aada neda dadaanan aasian 3 15 1104 3430 12 3 E 1 Contents SMR 4 Instrument FUNGCUOIS E 4 1 O 2 EEN 4 1 Frequency Offset and Multiplier nn 4 2 RP LOVOR A ii a ra iD iaa 4 3 Level Oliete ias 4 5 Non Interrupting Level Setting nn 4 5 Switching On Off Automatic Level Control We 4 6 User Correction UCN te Eege dee isn dE Ai EE es 4 8 RF ON OFF Key 2 2 22 ae es lese een
102. IST Subsystem Setting SOUR POW MODE LIST automatically sets command SOUR FREQ MODE to LIST as well Example SOUR POW MODE FIX RST value is FIX SOURce POWer STARt 130 dBm to 25 dBm without Option SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm The command sets the staring value for a level sweep STARt may be larger than STOP then the sweep runs from the high to the low level As to specified range cf POW Example SOUR POW STAR 20 RST value is 30 dBm or 20 dBm SOURce POWer STOP 130 dBm to 25 dBm without Option SMR B15 20 to 25 dBm The command sets the final value for a level sweep STOP may be smaller than STARt As to specified range cf POW Example SOUR POW STOP 3 RST value is 10dBm SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 0 1 to 10 dB The command sets the step width with the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as level values The command is coupled to Knob Step in the manual control i e it also specifies the step width of the shaft encoder Only dB is permissible as a unit here the linear units V W etc are not permitted Example SOUR POW STEP INCR 2 RST value is 1dB 1104 3430 12 6 31 E 1 SOURce PULM SMR SOURce PULM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the pulse modulation and to set the parameters of the modulation signal The internal pulse generator Option SMR B14 is set in the SOURce PULSe subsystem Command Paramete
103. M NEE 4 42 IEC IEEE Bus Address System GPID nen 4 43 Parameters of RS 232 C Interface System HG 4 44 Suppression of Indications and Clearing of Memories System Security 4 45 Indication of IEC IEEE Bus Language System Language ur nennen 4 45 1104 3430 12 4 E 1 SMR Contents Internal External Reference Frequency RefOSC 220444400nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 46 Passwords for Accessing Protected Functions Protect u 22244444444nn nennen 4 47 Calibration Gallb siria ee beine hen 4 48 Display of Module Versions Diag Congo 4 49 Display of Voltages of Test Points Diag TPoint suersnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 50 Display of Service Data Diag Param nenn 4 51 RRE 4 52 Assigning Modulations to the MOD ON OFF Key ModKey 2 2400 nennen 4 53 Setting the Auxiliary Inputs Outputs AUS WO 4 54 Setu Setu p irr te EE 4 55 Help System a ee Hierin 4 56 EL 4 56 5 Remote Control Basic Information uusuuu400000000nnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 1 Ell E deene 5 1 IE CAE NEE 5 1 e ern EE 5 2 Switchover to Remote Control uuesusnssansnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannunnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnn nn 5 3 Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus 5 3 Setting the Device Address 5 3 Indications during Remote Control 5 3 Return to Manual Operation 5 4 Remote Control
104. MODE STEP SOUR SWE POW MODE STEP TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG2 SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT Switching off sweep mode IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE CW SOUR2 FREQ MODE CW SOUR POW MODE CW An external signal at the rear input triggers the sweep in the Ext Single and Ext Step modes or stops the sweep in all modes Sweep Outputs The outputs X AXIS V GHz BLANK MARKER and Z AXIS at the rear of the instrument are available for controlling and triggering oscilloscopes or XY recorders X AXIS V GHz BLANK MARKER Z AXIS 1104 3430 12 With the sweep switched on this output supplies a voltage ramp of O to 10 V for the X deflection of an oscilloscope or an XY recorder This output supplies a voltage which is proportional to the frequency The slope either 0 5 V GHz or 1 V GHz corresponds to a range of 5 mV to 10 V or 10 mV to 20V for 10 MHz to 20 GHz A slope of 5 V GHz is available above 20 GHz SMR27 SMR40 The slope can be set under Utilities AuxlO V GHz The voltage is always available even with the sweep switched off This output supplies a signal 0 V 5 V for triggering and blanking an oscilloscope or for PEN LIFT control of an XY recorder The signal duration can be set under Utilities AuxlO Blank Time This output becomes active when the sweep run has reached the marker Th
105. OD FIX Indicates the level range of non interrupting level setting in Attenuator Mode Fixed Input value of step size of level variation via rotary knob The RF level is varied by the entered step size if Knob Step is set to User IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW STEP 1 Decimal The variation step size corresponds to the position of the digit cursor User User defined the variation step size is as entered under Knob Step User Selection of resolution of level display 0 1 dB The resolution of the level display is 0 1 dB 0 01 dB The resolution of the level display is 0 01 dB Selection of status to be assumed by RF output after power up of the instrument RF Off The RF output is switched off Previous Setting The RF output assumes the status active before switch off IEC IEEE bus command OUTP PON ON Off Normal setting The stored RF level is loaded too when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key or with a memory sequence IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW RCL INCL On The stored RF level is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded ie the current level setting is maintained IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW RCL EXCL 4 4 E 1 SMR RF Level Level Offset On the SMR it is possible to enter an offset for a subsequent attenuator amplifier if any in the Level menu The offset is taken into account in the display in the header line see below which represents the level value of the signal at the output of
106. OMM SER CONT RTS RFR XON XOFF Software handshake via ASCII codes 11h lt XON gt and 13h lt XOFF gt This setting should not be used for binary data transmission and for baud rates higher than 9600 baud IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PACE XON 1104 3430 12 4 44 E 1 SMR Utilities Suppression of Indications and Clearing of Memories System Security For reasons of security indications can be suppressed and memories cleared in the System Security submenu Menu selection Utilities System Security 10 000 0000000 ol 20 0 dem hes System Security Off Annotation Freq On Annotation Amplitude On Clear Memory Back ka Fig 4 36 Utilities System Security menu State Selection of Security status On Locks the suppression of indications Can be set only via the IEC IEEE bus Off Deactivates the interlock of the indication suppression On the ON OFF transition the preset state is set and all data such as stored settings user correction and list settings are saved Can be set only via the IEC IEEE bus IEC IEEE bus command SYST SEC OFF Annotation Freq Off All frequency indications are suppressed On The frequency setting is displayed IEC IEEE bus command DISP ANN FREQ ON Annotation Amplitude Off All level indications are suppressed On The level setting is displayed IEC IEEE bus command DISP ANN AMPL ON Clear Memory Clearing of all stored data su
107. ON OFF In the transition from ON to OFF all data existing in the instrument except for the calibrating data are deleted especially all status registers all instrument states and all lists The command is not influenced by RST and RCL Example SYST SEC STAT ON SYSTem SERRor This command returns a list of all errors existing at the point of time of the query This list corresponds to the indication on the ERROR page with manual control cf Chapter 9 Section Error Messages Example SYST SERR Answer 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range SYSTem VERSion The command returns the SCPI version number the instrument acts in accordance with This command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SYST VERS Answer 1994 0 1104 3430 12 6 50 E 1 SMR TEST TEST System This system contains the commands to execute the selftest routines RAM ROM and BATT as well as to directly manipulate the hardware modules TEST DIR The selftests return a 0 if the test has been executed successfully otherwise a value unequal to 0 All commands of this system do not have an RST value Caution The commands under node TEST DIR directly act on the respective hardware module circumventing any security mechanisms They are provided for service purposes and should not be used by the user Improper use of the commands may damage the module Command Parameters SE Remark TES
108. ON MENU VARIATION DATA INPUT 20 0 dem 10 000 0000000 cz Digital Mod Sweep Help Modulation Utilities Pulse Output IF Input Level Mem Seq QUICK SELECT LF Output List GER Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1104 3430 12 SMR 5 MENU VARIATION es kel Lal L Menu keys The menu keys access the menus and settings within the menus SELECT Acknowledges the choice marked by the menu cursor BACK Returns the menu cursor to the next higher menu level Moves the digit cursor to the left by one position in the marked value indication Moves the menu cursor to the left by one position in a 1 out of n selection gt Moves the digit cursor to the right by one position in the marked value indication Moves the menu cursor to the right by one position in a 1 out of n selection Rotary knob The rotary knob moves the menu cursor over the positions of a menu level to choose from or varies the value of a parameter The variation is either effected in steps of one or in a step width that can be specified at will Furthermore by pressing the rotary knob when the cursor marks a menu position the lower menu level or the setting menu is displayed cf function of SELECT key gt Cf Chapter 2 Section Sample Setting for First Users and Chapter 3 Section Basic Operating Steps 1 6 E 1
109. OOD lO 6 30 e eil 1 11 RE OUIDUL cid Tes ar deed Ca 1 7 6 11 RE SWCD EE 4 29 6 35 GWEN TIMES EE 4 30 E 1 Index Markekisan nahen hve AE EET 4 30 operating re EE 4 30 EE 4 30 eeler EE 1 6 3 2 3 3 RS 232 C Signal liN S inina e ine ae 5 28 RS 232 C interface Le brief instructions transmission parameters nnennennnnnnnn A 44 Sample SONO cion 2 1 Sample and Hold mode 4 6 Save instrument settings oooonmoocinconinicnncononccnnrccnncnnnnconanan no 3 14 SCPI ele ele E 5 6 SCHOIDAr EE 3 2 Select List nn Ra einer 3 8 Selection T outotn NN 3 4 quick selection Of men 3 4 E A een 4 52 6 51 SEMICDION EE 5 12 Sequence name deeg 6 49 Serial number display 4 51 Seral Doll ca ese ees 5 22 Service data displaye rian ona r aE 4 51 Service request PRO 5 22 7 4 Service request enable register SRE Short form commande A EE e EE 5 1 0 DIONALSCAlO iii ni 6 12 Signal Slopes 02 cie 4 54 Single pulse delay 4 15 4 23 Software verelon ron cnn nnnn caracas 6 8 displaye A rod ee 4 51 Source impedance RF output ooooococccocccicacanicanncanccanccnananos 4 9 Span FRE SSWOCD A OA 4 30 Speclal characters u unHe anne nern 6 2 Square brackets aseeseen A SRE service request enable register 5 19 SRQ Service request cooocicocinicinicincccocanonccarncnononenananccnn nono 5 22 Start frequency LF swoop iio En 6 39
110. OURce LIST POWer SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer SYSTem MSEQuence DWEL1 SYSTem MSEQuence RCL use the IEEE 754 format for double precision floating point numbers Each number is represented by 8 bytes Example att 125 345678E6 b 127 876543E6 CALL IBWRT generator SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREQ 216 MKDS a MKDS b in the command string introduces the binary block 2 indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next 16 is the length of the binary block in bytes here 2 double precision floating point numbers of 8 bytes each The binary data follow Since the function IBWRT requires a text string MKDS is used for type conversion The following ASCII format has the same effect CALL IBWRT generators SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREQ 125 345678E6 127 876543E6 5 11 E 1 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages SMR Overview of Syntax Elements Following is an overview of syntax elements EE EE SKS The colon separates the key words of a command Ina command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The ast
111. OURce2 MARKer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the marker generation in the case of LF sweeps The three markers existing are distinguished by a numeric suffix after marker Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 With Option SMR B5 FSWeep AOFF No query FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz Hz STATe ON OFF POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep The commands for the markers with the LF frequency sweep Frequency SWeep are under this node Keyword FSWeep can also be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see examples SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep AOFF The command switches off all LF frequency markers This command triggers an event thus is has no RST value and no query form Example SOUR2 MARK AOFF SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix at MARKer to the frequency defined RST value for MARK1 100 kHz MARK2 10 kHz Example SOUR2 MARK1 FREQ 9000 MARK3 kHz SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 FSWeep STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the marker selected by the numeric suffix at MARKer Example SOUR2 MARK1 STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce2 MARKer1 2 3 POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity of the marker signal as follows NORMal When running through the marker condition TTL level is applied at the marker output other
112. OUTP AMOD AUTO RST value is AUTO OUTPut1 ATTenuation 0 to 110 dB The command determines the attenuation value of the RF output signal in 10 dB steps IF input has to be switched on INPut IF STATe to ON Example OUTP ATT 20 dB RST value is 0 OUTPut1 IMPedance The command queries the impedance of the RF output output1 This permits converting the out put level between the units V and W The impedance itself cannot be changed For the RF output itis fixed at the value of 50 Ohm Example OUTP IMP Response 50 1104 3430 12 6 11 E 1 OUTPut SMR OUTPut3 POLarity PULSe NORMal INVerse The command determines the polarity of the signal at the PULSE VIDEO output Example OUTP3 POL PULS INV RST value is NORM OUTPut3 SCALe 0 5 1 The command defines the signal scale at the V GHz output output3 see also Chapter 4 Section Sweep Outputs Example OUTP3 SCAL 0 5 RST value is 1 OUTPut3 SOURce OFF PULSegen VIDeo The command selects between pulse generator and video output Example OUTP3 SOUR VID RST value is OFF OUTPut1 STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the RF output output1 or the LF output output2 The RF output can also be switched off by the response of the protective circuit But this has no influence on this parameter Note In contrast to the PRESET key command RST sets the value for output to OFF the RF output is deactivated Example OUTP STAT ON R
113. Off Single pulse IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DOUB OFF Selection of trigger mode Auto Trig The pulse generator is triggered automatically The pulse period is as entered under Pulse Period Ext Trig The pulse generator is externally triggered The pulse period is determined by an external signal at the PULSE input Ext Gated The pulse generator is triggered if the gate signal is active IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO Selection of active edge of external trigger signal Pos The pulse generator is triggered on the positive edge of the external signal Neg The pulse generator is triggered on the negative edge of the external signal IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SLOP POS Definition of active level of gate signal LOW or HIGH IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SOUR EXT_GATED Selection of 50 Q or 10 kQ input impedance IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULM EXT IMP 50 As an internal modulation source the pulse generator option SMR B14 offers the possibility of setting single and double pulses with variable pulse delay pulse width and pulse period The pulse generator can be triggered internally or by an external signal at the PULSE input The following Pulse modi can be selected Auto Trig Ext Trig and Ext Gated see Fig 4 13 to Fig 4 15 The internal trigger signal is derived from the reference frequency and hence very stable In the trigger mode Ext Trig the positive or the negative edge can be used for
114. Quency 1 5E3 The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numerical values In the case of a query the numerical value is returned Example Setting command SOURce VOLTage MAXimum Query SOURce VOLTage Response 15 MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and the maximum value DEFault denotes a preset value stored in an EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as called by the RST command UP DOWN increases or decreases the numerical value by one step The step width can be defined via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN see List of Commande chapter 6 INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a device response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0 In the case of a query 0 or 1 is returned Example Setting command SOURce FM STATe ON Query SOURce FM STATe Response 1 Text parameters follow the syntactic rules for key wo
115. ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command selects the reference source INTernal The internal oscillator is used EXTernal The reference signal is fed externally Example SOUR ROSC SOUR EXT RST value is INT 1104 3430 12 6 34 E 1 SMR SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the RF sweep Le sweeps of the RF generators Sweeps are triggered on principle The frequency sweep is activated by command SOUR FREQ MODE SWE the level sweep by command SOUR POW MODE SWE Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG FREQuency DWELI 10msto5s s MODE AUTO MANual STEP SPACing LINear LOGarithmic RAMP STEP LINear 0 to 1 GHz Hz LOGarithmic 0 01 to 100 PCT PCT POWer DWELI 10msto5s s MODE AUTO MANual STEP SPACing LOGarithmic STEP 0 to 160 dB dB LOGarithmic MAXimum MINimum SOURce SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG The command sets the blank time of the sweep The setting is valid for all sweeps i e also for LF sweeps NORMal Blank time as short as possible LONG Blank time long enough to permit an XY recorder to return to 0 Example SOUR SWE BTIM LONG RST value is NORM SOURce SWEep FREQuency The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node Keyword FREQuency can be omitted cf examples The commands are SCPI compatible then unless stated otherwise
116. RT generator FREQUENCY 250E6 RF Frequency 250 MHz CALL IBWRT generator POWER 10 Output power 10 dBm CALL IBWRT generator AM 80 AM with modulaton index of 80 CALL IBWRT generator AM INTERNAL FREQUENCY 3KHZ Modulation frequency 3kHz CALL IBWRT generators AM SOURCE INT Modulation source LF generator CALL IBWRT generator FREQUENCY STEP 12000 Step width RF frequency 12 kHz REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK K KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KA KK AAA AAA KA AAA AAA AA T Switchover to Manual Control REM Switch instrument over to manual control CALL IBLOC generators Set instrument to Local state REM KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKKK Reading out Instrument Settings The settings made in the example above are read out here The abbreviated commands are used REM Reading out instrument settings RFfrequency SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generators FREO Request frequency setting CALL IBRD generator RFfrequency Read value RFlevel SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator POW Request level setting CALL IBRD generator RFlevelS Read value AMmodulationdepth SPACES 20 Provide text variables with 20 characters CALL IBWRT generator
117. Romania Russian Federation Saudi Arabia Rohde amp Schwarz Nederland B V Perkinsbaan 1 3439 ND Nieuwegein ichecom 1 Lincoln Ave awa Wellington siehe see Mexico Ferrostaal Abuja Plot 3323 Barada Close P 0 Box 8513 Wuse Off Amazon Street aitama Abuja Rohde amp Schwarz Norge AS Enebakkveien 302 B 1188 Oslo est amp Measurement Products Way No 3503 Building No 241 Postal Code 112 Al Khuwair Muscat Siemens Pakistan 23 West Jinnah Avenue Islamabad siehe see Mexico siehe see Australia siehe see Argentina Rohde amp Schwarz Philippines Inc Unit 2301 PBCom Tower 6795 Ayala Ave cor Herrera St Makati City Rohde amp Schwarz SP z 0 0 Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce ul Stawki 2 Pietro 28 00 193 Warszawa Rohde amp Schwarz Portugal Lda Alameda Antonio Sergio 7 R C Sala A 2795 023 Linda a Velha siehe see Mexico Rohde amp Schwarz Representation Office Bucharest 89 Eroii Sanitari Bldv sector 5 050472 Bucuresti 119180 Yakimanskaya nab 2 oscow Liaison Office Riyadh c o Haji Abdullah Alireza Co Ltd P 0 Box 361 Riyadh 11411 ustafa Sultan Science amp Industry Co LLC Rohde amp Schwarz International GmbH Tel 31 30 600 17 00 Fax 31 30 600 17 99 info rsn rohde schwarz com Tel 64 4 232 32 33 Fax 64 4 232 32 30 rob nichecom co nz Tel 234 9 413 52 51 Fax 234 9 413 52 50 fsabuja rosecom net Tel
118. S 4 9 9 Q on 22 Fig 5 7 Wiring of data control and signalling lines for hardware handshake 1104 3430 12 5 30 E 1 SMR Description of Commands 6 Remote Control Description of Commands In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then described in detail separated according to the command system The notation corresponds to the one of the SCPI standards to a large extent The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the list of commands at the end of this chapter The description of manual operation Chapter 4 indicates the corresponding IEC IEEE bus command for each manual setting A general introduction to remote control and a description of the status registers are to be found in Chapter 5 Detailed program examples of the main functions are to be found in Chapter 7 Note In contrast to manual control which is intended for maximum possible operating convenience the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status This means that when incompatible settings are attempted the command is ignored and the device status remains unchanged i e is not adapted to other settings Therefore IEC IEEE bus control programs should always define an initial device status e g with command RST and then implement the required settings Notation Table of Commands Command In the command column the table provides a
119. SOUR PULS DOUB STAT OFF RST value is OFF SOURce PULSe PERiod 100 ns to 85s The command sets the pulse period The pulse period is the reciprocal value of the pulse frequency thus this command is coupled to command SOUR PULM INT FREQ Example SOUR PULS PER 2s RST value is 10 us SOURce PULSe WIDTh 20 ns to 1 3 s The command sets the pulse width Example SOUR PULS WIDT 0 1s RST value is 1 us 1104 3430 12 6 33 E 1 SOURce ROSCillator SMR SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the external and internal reference oscillator Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF VALue 2048 to 2047 SOURce INTernal EXTernal SOURce ROSCillator INTernal The commands to set the internal reference oscillator are under this node SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust The commands for frequency adjustment fine tuning of the frequency are under this node SOURce ROStCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF The command switches the frequency adjustment on or off Example SOUR ROSC INT ADJ STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 2048 to 2047 The command indicates the frequency correction value tuning value For a detailed definition cf Section Reference Frequency Internal External Example SOUR ROSC INT ADJ VAL 0 RST value is 0 SOURce
120. SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFF The command switches the level control on or off ON Level control is permanently switched on OFF Level control is switched on for a short period of time if the level changes Example SOUR POW ALC STAT ON RST value is ON SOURce POWer LEVel MMediate The commands to set the output levels for the CW and SWEEP modes are under this node SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 130 dBm to 25 dBm without SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm The command sets the RF output level in operating mode CW UP and DOWN can be indicated in addition to numeric values Then the level is increased or reduced by the value indicated under SOUR POW STEP In this command the OFFSet value is considered Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOUR POW OFFS 0 The keywords of this command are optional to a large extent thus the long as well as the short form of the command is shown in the example Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL 15 or POW 15 RST value is 30 dBm or 20 dBm SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude OFFSet 100 to 100 dB The command enters the constant level offset of a series connected attenuator amplifier cf Chapter 4 Section Level Offset If a level offset is entered the level entered using POW does no longer conform to the RF output level The following relation is true POW RF output level POW OFFS Entering a level offset does not
121. SOrvice Request 7 4 Operating the Generator in the IEC Bus Controller Mode ccssseeeeeessseeeeeseseceneeseecenenss 7 6 8 Maintenance eeleren 8 1 Cleaning the Outside 2 22 22 es E A 8 1 Storing and Packing iii ii 8 1 9 Error Messages E 9 1 List of Error Messages EE EE 9 2 SCPI Specific Error Messages 9 2 SMR Specific Error Messages oooooccccoccconocinonocononccnnnncnn non nnancc cnn cn rana rca 9 6 AAA 10 1 1104 3430 12 7 E 1 Contents Tables Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 1104 3430 12 SMR Input connectors for external modulation nen 4 10 Status messages for deviation from nominal at external modulation inputs 4 11 Modulation types which cannot be active simultaneously sense 4 12 Lstmode pral EE 4 34 Memory sequence example of lei 4 38 Synchronization by means of OPC OPC and WA 5 15 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte nn 5 19 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register 24 0444400nennnnnnnnnnnn nennen 5 20 Resetting of instrument functions anna 5 24 Interface FUNCTIONS oooocconnononocccnnoncnnnoononccnncnnnnnnnoncnncnn nan nano nn cnn tana Taaa atan rn cnn nn 5 26 Universal commande 5 27 Addressed coN Ee 5 27 Control characters for RS 232 C interface uursnnessnsnnsnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
122. ST value is OFF OUTPut1 STATe PON OFF UNCHanged This command selects the state the RF output output1 is to assume after power on of the unit It only exists for the RF output RST does not influence the set value OFF Output is switched off UNCHanged Same state as before switch off Example OUTP PON OFF OUTPut2 VOLTage 0Vto 4 V The command sets the voltage of the LF output output2 The voltage is a characteristic of the output not of the source l e the voltage is maintained even if another generator is connected to the output Example OUTP2 VOLT 3 0V RST value is 1 V 1104 3430 12 6 12 E 1 SMR SOURce System SOURce AM This system contains the commands to configure the RF signal source Keyword SOURce is optional i e it can be omitted The LF signal source included in Option SMR B5 is configured in the SOURce2 System The following subsystems are realized in the instrument Subsystem SOURce AM CORRection DM EM FREQuency LIST MARKer POWer PULM PULSe ROSCillator SWEep Settings Amplitude modulation Correction of the output level Digital modulation Frequency modulation Frequencies including sweep LIST operating mode Marker generation with sweeps Output level level control and level correction Pulse modulation Pulse generator Reference oscillator Sweeps SOURce AM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the amplitude modulation
123. STAR and STOP are allowed Example SOUR2 FREQ MAN 1kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce2 FREQuency MODE CW FIXed SWEep The command specifies the operating mode and hence by means of which commands the FREQuency subsystem is controled The following allocations are valid CW FIXed CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is specified by means of SOUR2 FREQ CW FIX SWEep The generator operates in the SWEep mode The frequency is specified by means of commands SOUR2 FREQ STAR STOP MAN Example SOUR2 FREQ MODE CW RST value is CW SOURce2 FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz This command defines the starting value of the frequency for the sweep Example SOUR2 FREQ STAR 100kHz RST value is 1kHz SOURce2 FREQuency STOP 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz This command defines the end value of the frequency for the sweep Example SOUR2 FREQ STOP 200kHz RST value is 100 kHz 1104 3430 12 6 39 E 1 SOURce2 FUNCtion SMR SOURce2 FUNCtion Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands specifying the waveform of the output signal Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce2 FUNCtion With Option SMR B5 SHAPe SINusoid SQUare SOURce2 FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid SQUare The command specifies the shape of the output signal SiNusoid Sine SQUare Square RST value is SIN Example SOUR2 FUNC SHAP SQU 1104 3430 12 6 40 E 1 SMR SOURce2 MARKer S
124. Service Request Making Use of Hierarchy Structure Under certain conditions the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller The service request normally triggers an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can respond with corresponding actions Fig 5 4 shows that an SRQ is triggered if one or several of the bits 2 3 4 5 and 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of another register the error queue or the output buffer By setting the ENABle parts of the status registers accordingly it is achieved that arbitrary bits of an arbitrary status register trigger an SRQ To make use of the possibilities of the service request all bits of the SRE and ESE enable registers should be set to 1 Examples see also Fig 5 4 and chapter 7 Programming Examples Use of command oPc to generate an SRQ gt Set bit O in the ESE Operation Complete gt Set bit 5 in the SRE ESB The instrument generates an SRQ after completion of its settings Indication of end of sweep by means of an SRQ at the controller gt Set bit 7 sum bit of STATus OPERation register in SRE gt Set bit 3 sweeping in STATus OPERation ENABle gt Set bit 3 in STATus OPERation NTRansition so that the transition of sweeping bit 3 from 1 to 0 end of sweep is recorded in the EVENt part The instrument generates an SRQ after completion of a sweep The SRQ is the only way for t
125. Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the output unit upon request A detailed description of the structure and function is given in section Status Reporting System 1104 3430 12 5 14 E 1 SMR Instrument Model and Command Processing Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller and output by the data set management The output unit processes the information in accordance with the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer The output buffer has a size of 256 characters If the requested information exceeds this size it is made available in portions without this being recognized by the controller If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit returns the error message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data are sent on the IEC IEEE bus The controller waits until it has reached its time limit This procedure is specified by SCPI Command Sequence and Command Synchronization As mentioned above overlapping execution is possible for all commands Likewise the setting commands of a command line are not necessarily processed in the order in which they are received To ensure that commands are carried out in a specific order each command must be sent in a separate command line ie with a
126. T DiRect Address subaddress hex data string ASSy Module subaddress hex data string RAM Query only ROM Query only BATTery Query only TEST DIRect Address subaddress hex data string This node contains the commands directly acting on the respective hardware module circumventing any security mechanisms The commands under this node have no short form TEST ASSy Module subaddress hex data string This command addresses the ASSy module A subaddress Oor 1 must be entered as a parameter The data are entered as a lt string gt ie an ASCII character string enclosed in inverted commas representing hexadecimal numbers The string therefore may contain the characters 0 to9AtoF TEST RAM The command triggers a test of the RAM TEST ROM The command triggers a test of the main memory EEPROM TEST BATTery The command triggers a test of the battery voltage 1104 3430 12 6 51 E 1 TRIGger SMR TRIGger System The TRIGger system contains the commands to select the trigger source and to configure the external trigger socket The trigger sources for the individual signal sources RF LFGen are distinguished by a numerical suffix appended to TRIG The suffix conforms to the numbering of the SOURce system TRIGger1 RF generator TRIGger2 LFGen The trigger system of the SMR consists of a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger system Compared to SCPI the TRIG system shows the following
127. TB AND 128 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Operationstatus IF STB AND 32 gt 0 THEN GOSUB Esrread END IF nouser NEXT 1 LOOP UNTIL SROFOUND 0 ON ERROR GOTO error handling ON PEN GOSUB Gro RETURN IO Di Enable SRQ routine again End of SRQ routine 104 3430 12 7 4 E 1 SMR Programming Examples Reading out the status event registers the output buffer and the error event queue is effected in subroutines REM Subroutines for the individual STB bits Outputqueue Reading the output buffer essageS SPACES 100 Make space for response CALL IBRD generator Message PRINT Message in output buffer Message RETURN Failure Read error queue ERRORS SPACES 100 Make space for error variable CA IBWRT generator s SYSTEM ERROR CALL IBRD generator ERRORS PRINT Error text ERRORS RETURN Questionablestatus Read questionable status register Ques SPACES 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL IBWRT generator STATus QUEStionable EVENt CALL IBRD generator Ques IF VAL Ques AND 128 gt 0 THEN PRINT Calibration Calibration is questionable IF VAL Ques AND 1 gt 0 THEN PRINT Voltage Output level questionable RETURN Operationstatus Read operation status register Oper SPACES 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable
128. TPoint Access to internal test points is offered by the Diag TPoint submenu If a test point is switched on the voltage is displayed in a window in the header field For more detailed information see service manual for the instrument Menu selection Utilities Diag TPoint 10 000 000077 2 72 20 0 dem Utlities Diag TFoint State Test Foint Back A Fig 4 41 Utilities Diag TPoint menu State Switching on off the voltage display in the header field Test Point Input value of test point IEC IEEE bus command DIAG POINxx 1104 3430 12 4 50 E 1 SMR Utilities Display of Service Data Diag Param The Diag Param submenu offers access to various parameters such as serial number software version operating hours counter and attenuator operating cycles Menu selection Utilities Diag Param 10 000 0000000 orl 20 0 dem 0123 4567 8 Software Version 11 Software Date dan 12 1333 Athen Count 10dE 21 Athen Count ZO 2s Fig 4 42 Utilities Diag Param menu For information on IEC IEEE bus commands see section DIAGnostic System 1104 3430 12 4 51 E 1 Utilities SMR Test The SMR carries out a selftest on switching on the instrument and permanently during operation On switching on the RAM and ROM contents are checked and the batteries of the non volatile RAMs are tested If an error is detected this is indicated through a corresponding error message The most important instrumen
129. This node contains all commands to trigger the pulse generator Option SMR B14 The commands are only valid for TRIG1 1104 3430 12 6 54 E 1 SMR TRIGger TRIGger PULSe SOURce AUTO trig EXT_trig EXT_Gated The command specifies the trigger source AUTO_trig Trigger is free running see above EXT_trig Triggering is effected from outside via the PULSE socket EXT_Gated Triggering is effected when the gate signal is active Example TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO RST value is AUTO TRIGger PULSe SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command defines whether the action triggered is triggered at the positive or the negative edge of the trigger signal Example TRIG PULS SLOP NEG RST value is POS TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative EITHer The command defines whether the external trigger input responds to the positive the negative or to both edges of the trigger signal The command acts on TRIG1 2 SWE TRIG LIST and TRIG MSEQ The pulse generator has an own trigger input and thus also an own SLOPe command Example TRIG SLOP NEG RST value is POS 1104 3430 12 6 55 E 1 List of Commande SMR List of Commands Command Parameter SCPI info Page ABORIL SWEep not SCH 6 6 ABORt LIST not SCPI 6 6 ABORt MSEQuence not SCPI 6 6 DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt ATTenuator1 2 3 4 not SCPI 6 7 DIAGnostic INFO CCOunt POWer not SCPI 6 7 DIAGnostic INFO MODules not SCPI 6 8 DIAGnost
130. a ae Rin Siete y 5 20 Key EA nen 1 5 3 6 TASSIGN EE 1 8 3 4 BACK EE 3 2 3 6 BACK ET 1 6 ERROR EE 9 1 FREQ anna 1 4 3 5 3 6 4 1 Oi o nee 15 IL LEE EH 4 56 UA DEE 1 4 3 5 3 6 4 3 LOCA RE 5 4 WME fetes ns o ee eh es re 15 1104 3430 12 10 3 Index MENU A 1 8 3 4 MOD ON OFF 1 7 3 5 4 12 4 53 IpESET cian 1 3 A REN 1 4 3 14 RF ON OFF 1 7 3 5 4 9 ee e E A 1 4 3 14 A 3 2 A ee Seven 1 6 STATUS 4 56 Backspace 3 6 ERROR cesante 1 7 le LE 1 7 EE 1 5 Lol 1 7 PRESET 1 7 A waren wa naar 1 7 unit key wished AU eet EE eher 1 5 Knob Step ee E 4 2 ELE 4 4 Level automatic contra 4 6 10101140 as O ne 4 6 6 29 Correction Ucor list 20u 22204 nennen 4 8 6 15 Indicali n a ae 3 1 limit 4 3 6 30 A meese urteilen 6 26 EEN 4 31 6 28 offset 4 3 4 5 6 30 RE OUIDU ini a ai ca 4 3 6 30 setting non interrupting 4 4 4 5 suppression of Iodleaton nennen 4 45 SWOOP anena ia n 4 31 UNM ices ans E 4 3 UNICO ANO Oi a cn awe aa 3 5 Level sweep OWNING ii ae 4 31 ET 4 32 SUE Oli ia iio 4 31 A EEA IE AE 4 31 stoplevel 2 u le ea 4 31 SWOOP MOC eet energie 4 31 EFgeneral f u uun it iia 4 18 6 38 E yan E 6 39 waveform 4 13 4 14 4 21 6 40 LP ouiput Lita an A 1 9 4 21 VO A an 4 21 LF sweep 4 32 6 39 dwell time 4 32 6 42 e et ici A ao 4 32 frequency marker eeesecsete
131. able 6 16 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 1 GHZ to Fmax 1 GHz to Fmax with not SCPI 6 16 Option SMR B11 above 10 MHz SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 20 to 20dB 20 to 20dB not SCPI 6 16 SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts not scht 6 16 SOURce CORRection CSET DELete Name of table not SCPI 6 16 SOURce DM TYPE ASK FSK not SCPI 6 17 SOURce DM STATe ON OFF not SCPI 6 17 SOURce DM EXTernal IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm not SCPI 6 17 1104 3430 12 SMR Command SOURce DM ASK DEPTh List of Commands 0 to 100 PCT Parameter SCPI info not SCPI 6 18 SOURce DM ASK POLarity NORMal INVerted not SCPI 6 18 SOURce DM FSK DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz Inotscp 618 SOURce DM FSK POLarity NORMal INVerted not Sch Lem SOURce DM FM DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz Inotscp 619 SOURce FM EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC 6 19 SOURce FM EXTernal1 2 1MPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm 6 19 SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 6 20 SOURce FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal1 6 20 SOURce FM STATe ON OFF 6 20 SOURce FREQuency CENTer 1 GHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 6 21 10 MHz to Fmax SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed 1 GHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 6 21 10 MHz to Fmax SOURce FREQuency RCL INCLude EXCLude 6 22 SOURce F REQ
132. altered Start Freq Center Freq Span 2 Stop Freq Center Freq Span 2 1104 3430 12 4 25 E 1 Sweep SMR Selecting Linear Logarithmic Sweep Lin Log Spacing Linear or logarithmic sweep can be selected with Spacing For RF and LF sweeps both the linear and logarithmic modes are selectable For level sweeps only the logarithmic mode is possible With logarithmic sweeps the step size Step is equal to a constant fraction of the current setting The logarithmic step size for RF and LF sweeps is entered in and for level sweeps in dB Operating Modes Mode The following sweep modes are available Auto Sweep from start point to stop point with automatic restart at start point If another sweep mode was active prior to selection of the auto mode the sweep is continued from the setting active at that time IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR AUTO TRIG2 SOUR AUTO TRIG SOUR AUTO Single Single sweep from start point to stop point The selection of Single does not start a sweep run The sweep run is started by means of the Execute Single Sweep function which is displayed below the Mode line IEC IEEE bus commands RF sweep LF sweep Level sweep SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE
133. alues LIST FREO 575MHz 235MHz 123MHz 456MHz 735MHz 333MHz Fill frequency list with values LIST DWELL 0 2 200ms per item TRIGGER LIST SOURCE AUTO Permanently repeat list automatically POWER MODE LIST Switch over instrument to list mode REM KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kk kk ARA kk kk kk kk kk kk AAA AAA kk kk kk AAA RA Command synchronization The possibilities for synchronization implemented in the following example are described in Chapter 5 Section Command Order and Command Synchronization SE Examples of command synchronization Command ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT has a relatively long execution time over 300ms It is to be ensured that the next command is only executed ee First possibility Use of WAI oscillator has settled ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT WAI FREQUENCY 100MHZ ty Use of OPC Space for OPC Provide response ROSCILLATOR SOURCE INT OPC controller can service other instruments Wait for 1 from OPC service request function in conjugation GPIB driver the setting Disable Auto ves by means of IBCONF Permit service request for ESR Set event enable bit for operation complete bit Initialization of the service request routine ROSCILLATOR
134. ame basic syntax elements as well as the common commands defined in this standard Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined in greater detail than in standard IEEE 488 2 see section Responses to Queries Structure of Commands Commands consist of a header and in most cases one or several parameters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal eg a blank Headers may consist of several key words Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header Note The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the instrument Common commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and of one or several parameters if any Examples RST RESET resets the instrument ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enable register ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY queries the contents of the event status register Device specific commands Hierarchy Device specific commands are of a hierarchical structure see Fig 5 1 The different levels are represented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SOURce This key word denotes the SOURce command system For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the hig
135. an be written to and read Reading does not affect its contents With the above two edge register parts the user can define what status transition of the CONDition part none O to 1 1 to 0 or both is to be stored in the EVENt part The EVEN part indicates whether an event has occurred since it was read the last time it is the memory of the CONDition part It indicates only those events that were passed on by the edge filters The EVENt part is continuously updated by the instrument This part can be read only Upon reading its contents is set to zero In linguistic usage the EVENt part is often treated as equivalent to the complete register The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENABle Bit 0 the associated EVEN bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABle Bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written to and read Reading does not affect its contents As mentioned above the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt part and the ENABle part for each register The result is entered as a bit of the CONDition part into the next higher register The instrument automatically generates a sum bit for each register It is thus ens
136. and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue see section Error Messages This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be executed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue see section Error Messages 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically not correct An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue see section Error Messages 6 User Request This bit is set when the LOCAL key is pressed ie when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On AC supply voltage On This bit is set on switching on the instrument 4 Execution Error 1104 3430 12 5 20 E 1 SMR Status Reporting System STATus OPERation Register Not impemented STATus QUEStionable Register Not implemented 1104 3430 12 5 21 E 1 Status Reporting System SMR Use of Status Reporting System To make effective use of the status reporting system the information collected there must be transferred to the controller and further processed There are several methods to this effect which are described in the following For detailed examples see chapter 7 Programming Examples
137. and can be used to generate new lists Example SYST MSEO SEL SEQA 1104 3430 12 6 49 E 1 SYSTem SMR SYSTem PRESet The command triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as the PRESET key of the manual control or as command RST This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Example SYST PRES SYSTem PROTect 1 2 3 The commands to disable certain instrument functions are under this node A list of the functions concerned can be found in the manual control Chapter 4 Section Password Input With Protected Functions There are three protection levels which are distinguished by means of a suffix after PROT RST has no effects on the disabling enabling of the instrument functions SYSTem PROTect 1 j2 3 STATe ON OFF Password The command switches a protection level on or off The passwords are 6 digit numbers They are fixedly stored in the firmware The password for the first level is 123456 ON disables the functions belonging to this protection level A password doesn t have to be entered OFF deactivates the disabling again if the correct password is entered Otherwise an error 224 Illegal parameter value is generated and STATe remains ON Example SYST PROT1 STAT OFF 123456 SYSTem SECurity STATe ON OFF The command switches the security state on or off ON The following commands cannot be executed DISP ANN ALL ON DISP ANN FREQ ON DISP ANN AMPL
138. ands for the STATus QUEStionable register are under this node STATus QUEStionable EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus QUEStionable register In reading out the content of the EVENt part is deleted Example STAT QUES EVEN Answer 1 STATus QUEStionable CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register In reading out the content of the CONDition part is not deleted Example STAT QUES COND Answer 2 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 to 32767 The command Positive TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus QUEStionable register from 0 to 1 for transitions of the CONDition bit Example STAT QUES PTR 32767 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 0 to 32767 The command Negative TRansition sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus QUEStionable register from 1 to 0 for transitions of the CONDition bit Example STAT QUES NTR 0 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 to 32767 The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part selectively enables the individual events of the appropriate EVENt part for the sum bit in the status byte Example STAT QUES ENAB 1 STATus QUEue NEXT The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time and thus deletes it Positive error numbers denot
139. arallel polling state Addressed Commands Addressed commands are in the code range 00 to OF hex They only act on instruments addressed as listeners Table 5 7 Addressed commands Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting GET Group Execute Trigger IBTRG device Triggers a previously active instrument function eg a sweep The effect of this command is identical to that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local IBLOC device Transition to LOCAL state manual control PPC Parallel Poll Configure IBPPC device data Configures the instrument for parallel polling The QuickBASIC command additionally executes PPE PPD 1104 3430 12 5 27 E 1 Interfaces SMR RS 232 C Interface The instrument is fitted with an RS 232 C interface as standard The 9 contact interface is provided at the rear of the unit A controller for remote control can be connected via the interface Characteristics of Interface Serial data transmission in asynchronous mode Bidirectional data transmission via two separate lines Selectable transmission rate from 120 to 15200 baud e Logic 0 signal level from 3 V to 15 V e Logic 1 signal level from 15 V to 3 V An external unit
140. arameters corresponds to the one with sweep mode SCPI uses other designations for the parameters the instrument accepts as well These designations are to be preferred if compatibility is important The following table provides an overview SMR designation SCPI designation Command with manual control AUTO IMMediate Mode Auto SINGle BUS Mode Single or Step EXTernal EXTernal Mode Ext Trig Single or Ext Trig Step AUTO The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is permanently fulfilled As soon as the list selected has been finished in the LIST mode it is started anew SINGle Triggering is executed by means of IEC bus command TRIG LIST IMM The list is executed once EXTernal Triggering is carried out from outside via the EXT TRIG socket or by the GET command via IEC IEEE bus The list is executed once Example TRIG LIS SOUR AUTO RST value is SING TRIGger MSEQuence This node contains all commands to trigger a memory sequence The commands are only valid for TRIG1 TRIGger MSEQuence IMMediate The command immediately starts a memory sequence It corresponds to the Execute Single Mode command of the Memory Sequence menu This command is an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG MSEQ IMM TRIGger MSEQuence SOURce SINGle EXTernal AUTO The command specifies the trigger source cf TRIG SWE SOUR Example TRIG MSEQ SOUR AUTO RST value is SING TRIGger PULSe
141. ator POW 7 3dBm Set output level to 7 3 dBm CALL IBWRT generator OUTP STAT ON Switch RF output on CALL IBWRT generator AM SOUR INT Set AM modulation source Lfgen CALL IBWRT generator AM INT FREQ 15kHz Set AM modulation frequency to 15 kHz CALL IBWRT generator AM 30PCT Set AM modulation depth to 30 CALL IBWRT generator AM STAT ON Switch on AM An amplitude modulated signal is now present at the output of the instrument 3 To return to manual control press the LOCAL key on the front panel 1104 3430 12 5 1 E 1 Brief Instructions SMR RS 232 C Interface It is assumed that the configuration of the RS 232 C interface of the unit has not yet been changed 1 Connect the unit and the controller using the null modem cable 2 Enter the following command on the controller to configure the controller interface mode com1 9600 n 8 1 3 Create the following ASCII file on the controller Switch instrument to remote control RETURN ARSTHFELS Reset instrument FREQ 5GHz Set frequency to 5 GHz POW 7 3dBm Set output level to 7 3 dBm OUTP STAT ON Switch on RF output AM 30PCT Set AM modulation depth to 30 AM STAT ON Switch on AM RETURN 4 Transfer the ASCII file to the instrument via the RS 232 C interface Enter the following command on the controller copy lt filename gt com1 An amplitude modulated signal is now present at the output of the instrument 5 To return to ma
142. ause irreversible damage to your eyes Never try to take such products apart and never look into the laser beam Sheet 4 Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de la primera puesta en funcionamiento las siguientes informaciones de seguridad Informaciones de seguridad Es el principio de Rohde amp Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al dia con los estandards de seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el m ximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segun las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestra secci n de gesti n de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas Este producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el comprobante de conformidad adjunto segun las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable segun los estandards t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros deber el usuario atenerse a todas las informaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la ind stria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna per
143. be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see example Example SOUR SWE STEP 10dB RST value is 1dB 1104 3430 12 6 37 E 1 SOURce2 FREQuency SMR SOURce2 System The SOURce2 system contains the commands to configure the LF signal source which is part of Option SMR B5 The LF signal source s designated as INT if it is used as a modulation source if it is used as an LF generator it is designated as SOURce2 The commands to set the output voltage of the LF generator are in the OUTPut2 system Subsystems Settings SOURce2 FREQuency Frequency with CW and sweep operation FUNCtion Waveform of the output signal MARKer Marker for LF sweeps SWEep LF sweep SOURce2 FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings including the sweeps Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce2 FREQuency With Option SMR B5 CW FlXed 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz MANual 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz MODE CW FIXed SWEep STARt 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz STOP 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 1104 3430 12 6 38 E 1 SMR SOURce2 FREQuency SOURce2 FREQuency CW FIXed 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz The command sets the frequency for the CW mode Example SOUR2 FREQ CW 1kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce2 FREQuency MANual 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz The command sets the frequency if SOUR2 SWE MODE MAN and SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE are set In this case only frequency values between the settings SOUR2 FREQ
144. bit by bit with bit 6 being taken into account The results are ORed and the result of this is sent possibly inverted in response to a parallel poll by the controller The result can also be queried without a parallel poll using the command IST The instrument first has to be set for parallel polling by means of the QuickBASIC command IBPPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using IBRPP The parallel poll method is mainly used in order to find out quickly after an SRQ which instrument has sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus To this effect the SRE and the PPE must be set to the same value A detailed example on parallel polling will be found in chapter 7 Programming Examples Query by Means of Commands Each part of every status register can be read by means of a query The queries to be used are included with the detailed description of the registers In response to a query a number is always returned which represents the bit pattern of the register queried The number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are normally used after an SRQ to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries to the error queue are detailed plain text error messages which
145. ble regtster 5 20 1104 3430 12 10 5 Index Preset instrument states urnunnsnernenenennennenneneennn 6 50 Presettings u seen we 1 3 Programming Examples ra Protection level rss inerent ao 6 50 PTRansition EE 5 17 Pulse Oelay scree nnd 4 15 4 23 6 33 ee EE 4 15 4 23 6 33 11 Te 111 EEA EE PAE EA E E ET ATT 4 15 4 23 6 33 Pulse goenerator 4 16 6 33 input Impedance cette eteneeseeeeeeeeees 4 16 4 24 PULSE Input a sets 1 7 4 16 6 55 Pulse modulation 4 15 6 32 p larity sinia ina 6 32 Pulse polarity E 4 15 4 23 Pulse source Gel GE 4 15 4 23 6 12 PULSE VIDEO output cocoocccnccccnocanonccanccinnncnannos 1 11 4 23 6 12 Putting into Operation EMG a da 1 1 UNPACKING EE 1 1 e 5 5 Query GO QUEUB cintia 5 23 responses to Query Error bit Question mark QUEStionable Status SUM Di L 19 Quick gelehen gene geseet tt 3 4 R eg 4 52 RCL list Mseq E ECC AA OTTO 1 9 Recall instrument SettiNgS A 3 14 REF ee ee 1 9 4 46 Reference OXICI AL nn A e iria 4 46 INPUVOULPUL neenennennernenennnnnnnnnnnennnnner nennen 6 34 Te TEE 4 46 Reference oscillator OCKO 6 34 Remote Ol acosta ticos i 2 6 1 basic Jotormation une we DT Imdieations u 9 3 Switchover to remote Contro nenn 5 3 REMOTE Stalin aA 5 3 Reset status reporting gege 5 24 Response ee E 5 9 RF TOQUEN CY iii ai 4 1 LV Olot E TE 4 3 G
146. can be displayed in the Error menu by manual control or queried via the IEC IEEE bus with the command SYSTem ERRor Each call of SYSTem ERRor provides one entry from the error queue If no more error messages are stored there the instrument responds with 0 ie No error The error queue should be queried by the controller program after each SRQ as the entries provide a more precise description of the cause of an error than the status registers Especially during the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since errored commands from the controller to the instrument are also recorded in the error queue 1104 3430 12 5 23 E 1 Status Reporting System Reset Values of Status Reporting System SMR Table 5 4 lists the commands and events that cause a reset of the status reporting system Except for RST and SySTem PRI ESet none of the commands has an effect on the functional settings of the instrument It should be noted in particular that DCL also does not change instrument settings Table 5 4 Event Power On Status Resetting of instrument functions Switching on of AC supply voltage DCL SDC Device Clear RST or STATus PRESet CLS Clear Selected Device SYSTem PRESet Clear Effect 0 1 Clears STB ESR yes er yes Clears SRE ESE yes ur Clears PPE yes Clears EVENt parts of the
147. ch as stored settings user correction and list settings Two IEC IEEE bus commands are required for this action IEC IEEE bus command SYST SEC ON SEC OFF Indication of IEC IEEE Bus Language System Language The Utilities System Language submenu indicates the IEC IEEE bus language and the current SCPI version 1104 3430 12 4 45 E 1 Utilities SMR Internal External Reference Frequency RefOsc In the internal reference mode the internal reference signal with a frequency of 10 MHz is available at the REF socket on the rear of the instrument Signal level Vrms EMF sine 1 V In the external reference mode an external signal with a frequency of 1 MHz to 16 MHz steps 1 MHz is to be fed to the REF socket The external reference mode can be selected in the Utilities RefOsc menu Signal level Vrms 0 1 V to 2 V If the external reference mode is selected the information Ext Ref is displayed in the status line Settings for the reference frequency can be made in the RefOsc menu Menu selection Utilities RefOsc 10 000 000 0000 cz LltitiezJPer sc Adjustment State Frequency Adjustment Fig 4 37 Utilities RefOsc menu preset setting Source Selection of operating mode Int Internal reference mode Ext External reference mode IEC IEEE bus command ROSC SOUR INT Adjustment State Off Tuning value of internal reference frequency as calibrated see Utilities Calib menu On Tuning value corresp
148. command SOUR POW ALC OFF Search Once Manual brief switch on of level control for level calibration in the ALC State Off mode IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC ON ALC OFF Source Selection of detector for level control Int The internal detector is switched on IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC SOUR INT Diode A diode detector can be connected to the EXT ALC input IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC SOUR DIOD Pmeter A power meter can be connected to the EXT ALC input IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC SOUR PMET Power Meter Type Selection of power meter R amp S NRVS Power Meter NRVS from Rohde amp Schwarz HP436A HP437 HP438A Power Meter HP436A HP437 or HP438A from Hewlett Packard IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC SOUR PMET RS_NRVS Reference Input value of reference voltage for operation with an external diode detector or a power meter from Hewlett Packard IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW ALC REF 1 1104 3430 12 4 7 E 1 RF Level SMR User Correction Ucor The User correction function can be used to create and activate lists in which level correction values are assigned to arbitrary RF frequencies Up to 10 lists with a total of 160 correction values can be compiled For frequencies not included in the list level correction values are determined by interpolation based on the nearest correction values When user correction is switched on Ucor user correction is displayed in the header field in addition to t
149. control is switched off ALC State Off switchover is made to a sample and hold mode In this mode level control is switched on automatically for a short time after each level or frequency setting and the level control is held at the value attained Level control OFF is used in multisource measurements to improve intermodulation suppression The basic functions of level control are shown in Fig 4 5 Synthesizer Level control RF amplifier kk A Internal gt detector e ecg Differential Integrator d r amplifier Reference voltage Fig 4 5 Basic principle of level control of SMR Fig 4 6 illustrates an example of external level control Power meter NRVS Signal generator SMR DC FREQ QV CHz E EXT ALC o Km DC m g RF Power sensor e gt DUT Fig 4 6 Example of external level control with power meter 1104 3430 12 4 6 E 1 SMR RF Level Menu selection Level Alc 10 0000000000 cz Level alc Source Int Power Meter Type RESHAWS Back 4 Ur Search Once Fig 4 7 Level Alc menu preset setting State On Normal status Internal level control is switched on permanently Off Internal level control is switched off No AM or ASK is possible in this status IEC IEEE bus
150. controller is not included The data set is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software IEC IEEE bus setting commands cause an alteration of the data set The data set management enters the new values eg frequency into the data set but passes them on to the hardware only upon request by the command recognition As this is only effected at the end of a command line the sequence of setting commands in the command line is not relevant The data are only checked for compatibility among one another and with the instrument hardware immediately before they are transferred to the instrument hardware If it is found that an execution is not possible an execution error is signalled to the status reporting system All alterations mad to the data set are cancelled and the instrument hardware is not reset Due to the delayed checking and hardware setting it is permissible however that impermissible instrument states are briefly set within a command line without an error message being produced At the end of the command line however a permissible instrument state must be attained Before the data are passed on to the hardware the settling bit in the STATus OPERation register is set The hardware makes the settings and resets the bit when the new state has settled This procedure can be used for synchronization of command processing IEC IEEE bus queries cause the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit
151. cribes the manual control of the microwave signal generator for example calling up of menus selection and editing of parameters use of the list editor and the SAVE RECALL function This chapter also contains an overview of menus showing the functions available for the instruments and its options It is useful to read the sample settings for first users in Chapter 2 Short Tutorial Design of the Display o 10 000000 0000 cuz 2 Msi Frequency LF Output List 3 Leuel Modulation Digital Mod Pulse Output IF Input Sweep Mem Seq Utilities Help Fig 3 1 Design of the display 1 Header field 2 Status line 3 Menu fields 1104 3430 12 The header field of the display indicates frequency and level of the RF output signal In the RF sweep operating mode the start and stop frequencies are displayed in two lines one above the other The start and stop levels are indicated in the LEVEL sweep operating mode correspondingly The status line indicates at the left the menu path of the current menu and at the right the operating mode and operating state of the instrument Error messages and notes for caution are also displayed in the status line The indication fields below the status line are reserved for the menu representations The image contents of these fields change as a function of the menu selected The lowest menu level shows the setting menu with the current settings of the selected menu Settings are made
152. cy see Data Sheet Although the LF generator is used as modulation source the frequency deviation is independent of the voltage at the LF output Example SOUR FM1 DEV 5kHz RST value is 10 kHz SOURce FM EXTernal1 2 The commands to set the external FM input are under this node The settings under EXTernal for modulations AM and FM are independent of each other The settings are always related to the socket which is determined by the numeric suffix after EXTernal A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1 SOURce FM EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC The command selects the type of coupling for the external FM input AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not altered Example SOUR FM EXT COUP AC RST value is AC SOURce FM EXTernal1 2 IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm The command defines the input impedance of the external FM input This command is coupled to the commands SOUR AM EXT IMP and SOUR DM EXT IMP Example SOUR FM EXT IMP 100kOhm RST value is 100 kOhm 1104 3430 12 6 19 E 1 SOURce FM SMR SOURce FM INTernal The settings for the internal LF generator are effected under this node Here the same hardware is set for FM AM INT and SOURce2 This means that e g the following commands are coupled to each other and have the same effect SOUR AM INT FREO SOUR FM INT FREQ SOUR2 FREQ CW
153. cy CENTer 1 GHz to Fnax 10 MHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 The command sets the sweep range by means of the center frequency This command is coupled to the commands SOUR FREQ STAR and SOUR FR EQ STOP Here the Offset value is taken into account Thus the frequency range quoted is only valid for OFFSet 0 and MULTiplier 1 Example SOUR FR ENT 10GHz EQ C RST value is STARt STOP 2 SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed 1 GHz to Fmax 10 MHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 The command sets the frequency for CW operation This value is coupled to the current sweep frequency In addition to a numeric value UP and DOWN can be indicated The frequency is increased or reduced by the value set under SOUR FR FR EQ C ENT Example SOUR FRI 1104 3430 12 EQ CW 10GHz 6 21 EQ ST EP as to specify range see RST value is 10 GHz E 1 SOURce FREQuency SMR SOURce FREQuency RCL INCLude EXCLude The command determines the effect of the recall function on the frequency RST value has no effect to this setting INCLude The saved frequency is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the RCL key or with a memory sequence EXCLude The RF frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded the current settings are maintained Example SOUR FREQ RCL INCL SOURce FREQuency MANual 1 GHz to Fmax 10 MHZ to Fmax with Option
154. d can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product Sheet 3 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Safety Instructions If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the PE terminal on site and the product s PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a skilled electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that suitable protection is provided for users and products Do not insert any objects into the openings in the housing that are not designed for this purpose Never pour any liquids onto or into the housing This can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a thunderstorm can reach the product Otherwise the operating personnel will be endangered by electric shocks Rohde amp Schwarz products are not protected against penetration of water unless otherwise specified see also safety instruction 1 If this is not taken into account there exists the danger of electric shock or damage to the product which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g
155. d digital modulations sweep list mode memory sequence and general functions not directly related to signal generation RF Frequency The RF frequency can be set directly using the FREQ key or via the Frequency menu In the Frequency menu the frequency of the RF output signal is entered and indicated under Frequency In frequency settings made with the FREQ key an arithmetic offset is taken into account Such settings are indicated in the header line of the display This makes it possible to enter the desired output frequency of subsequent units if any eg mixers The offset and the multiplier can also be entered in the Frequency menu see next section Frequency Offset and Multiplier Note Further settings Frequency sweep Sweep menu LF frequency Modulation menu LF Output menu Int ext reference frequency Utilities Ref Osc menu Menu selection Frequency 10 0000000000 cu Frequency 10 0000000000 GHz 0 0 Hz 1 0 1 000000 MHz Decimal Exclude from Recall On Back d Fig 4 1 Frequency menu preset setting Frequency Input value of RF frequency at RF output connector IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ 10E9 Offset Input value of frequency offset for example of subsequent mixer IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ OFFS 0 Multiplier Input value of multiplier eg subsequent frequency multiplier IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ MULT 1 1104 3430 12 4 1 E 1 RF Frequency SMR
156. d the instrument be damaged immediately notify the forwarder who shipped the instrument to you and keep the box and packing material For further transport or shipment of the SMR the original packing should also be used It is recommended to keep at least the two protective caps for front and rear side in order to prevent damage to the controls and connectors Supply Voltage The SMR can be operated at a c systems from 100 to 120 V and 200 to 240 V at system frequencies from 50 to 60 Hz The power supply socket is situated at the rear of the instrument The instrument automatically sets itself to the voltage applied within the permissible voltage ranges It is not necessary to set the instrument to a certain supply voltage How to Ensure EMC In order to avoid electromagnetic interference the instrument may only be operated when it is closed and with all shielding covers fitted Only appropriate shielded signal and control cables may be used 1104 3430 12 1 1 E 1 Putting into Operation SMR Power Fuses The SMR is protected against short circuits by means of two fuses according to nameplate of the power supply The fuses are situated in the draw out fuse holder which is inserted close to the power supply socket see below Power supply socket Fuse holder Power supply socket at the rear of the instrument Switching On Off the Instrument Switch on gt Press switch I e The instrument is ready fo
157. de schwarz com Tel 880 2 881 06 53 Fax 880 2 882 82 91 Tel 32 2 721 50 02 Fax 32 2 725 09 36 info rsb rohde schwarz com Tel 55 11 56 44 86 11 Av Alfredo Egidio de Souza Aranha r8 naral 55 11 56 44 86 25 sales 1 andar Santo Amaro 04726 170 Sao Paulo SP George Keen Lee Equipment Pte Ltd 1411 01 BP Tower 396 Alexandra Road Singapore 119954 Rohde amp Schwarz Representation Office Bulgaria 39 Fridtjof Nansen Blvd 1000 Sofia Rohde amp Schwarz Canada Inc 555 March Rd anata Ontario K2K 2M5 Dymeg Ltda Av Larrain 6666 Santiago Rohde amp Schwarz China Ltd Representative Office Beijing 6F Parkview Center 2 Jiangtai Road Chao Yang District Beijing 100016 Rohde amp Schwarz China Ltd Representative Office Shanghai Room 807 809 Central Plaza 227 Huangpi North Road Shanghai 200003 Rohde amp Schwarz China Ltd Representative Office Guangzhou Room 2903 Metro Plaza 183 Tian He North Road Guangzhou 510075 Fax 55 11 56 44 86 36 sales brazil rsdb rohde schwarz com Tel 656 276 06 26 Fax 656 276 06 29 gkleqpt singnet com sg Tel 359 2 96 343 34 Fax 359 2 963 21 97 rs bulgaria rsbg rohde schwarz Tel 1 613 592 80 00 Fax 1 613 592 80 09 sales rscanada ca Tel 56 2 339 20 00 Fax 56 2 339 20 10 dymeq dymeq com Tel 86 10 64 31 28 28 Fax 86 10 64 37 98 88 info rschina rsbp rohde schwarz c
158. e MARKER signal can be used for brightness control of an oscilloscope Up to 10 markers can be set to mark positions in the sweep run The duration of the active signal is equal to the dwell time DWELL of a step This output generates a pulse of 5 V if the MARKER output is active and 5 V if the BLANK output is active The Z AXIS signal can be used for the combined blanking and marker generation for network analyzers 4 27 E 1 Sweep SMR Sweep timing examples X AXIS V GHz 5V MARKER OV 5V MARKER OV Fig 4 21 Example of sweep signal 0 to 20 GHz Mode Auto V GHz 1 V GHz Blank Time Normal Z AXIS BLANK 5 V Z AXIS MARKER 5 V 1104 3430 12 4 28 E 1 SMR Sweep SINGLE restarted 10V X AXIS oV 5V BLANK oV Fig 4 22 Example of sweep signal Mode Single Blank Time Long RF Sweep Settings for RF sweeps can be made in the Sweep Freq menu Menu selection Sweep Freq 11 000 000 0000 cH 20 0 dem Sweep Freq Fig 4 23 Sweep Freq menu 1104 3430 12 4 29 E 1 Sweep Start Freq Stop Freq Center Freq Span Current Freq Spacing Spacing Lin Dwell Mode Reset Sweep Exec Single Sweep Marker 1 10 Freq Marker 1 10 State Marker 1 10 Amplitude 1104 3430 12 SMR Input value of start frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ STAR 10GHz Input valu
159. e command sets the software handshake RST has no influnence on this parameter XON Software handshake using the ASCII codes 11h XON and 13h XOFF Note This mode is not recommended for binary data and for baud rates above 9600 bauas NONE No software handshake Example SYST COMM SER PACE NONE RST value is NONE 1104 3430 12 6 47 E 1 SYSTem SMR SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity ODD EVEN NONE The command defines the parity test Example SYST COMM SER PAR ODD RST value is EVEN SYSTem ERRor The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time Positive error numbers denote errors specific of the instrument negative error numbers denote error messages specified by SCPI see Chapter 5 If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to STAT QUE NEXT Example SYST ERR Answer 221 Settings conflict SYSTem MODE FIXed MSEQence The command sets the operating mode of the instrument FIXed The overall instrument state can only be switched over using RCL MSEQuence The instrument successively sets the instrument states defined under SYST MSEQ RCL Example SYST MODE FIX RST value is FIX SYSTem MSEQuence This node follows the SOUR LIST system It can manage several memory sequences which each consist of a list of instrument state numbers and a time list If SYST MODE is switched to MS
160. e errors specific of the instrument negative error numbers error messages specified by SCPI see Chapter 5 If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to SyST ERR Example STAT QUE NEXT Answer 221 Settings conflict 1104 3430 12 6 45 E 1 SYSTem SMR SYSTem System In this system a number of commande for general functions which are not immediately related to signal generation are combined Command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess SERial BAUD BITS SBITs CONTrol RTS PACE PARity ERRor MODE MSEQuence CATalog DELete ALL DWELI FREE MODE RCL POINts SELect PRESet PROTect 1 2 3 STATe SECurity STATe SERRor VERSion SYSTem COMMunicate Parameters 0 to 30 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 7 8 112 ON IBFull RFR XON NONE ODD EVEN ZERO ONE NONE FlXed MSEQuence Sequence name 50 ms to 60 s 50 ms to 60 s AUTO STEP 1 to 50 1 to 50 Sequence name ON OFF password ON OFF Default Unit The commands to set the remote control interfaces are under this node SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB The commands to control the IEC bus are under this node GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus 1104 3430 12 6 46 Remark Query only Query only Query only No Query Query only Query only E 1 SMR SYSTem
161. e fraction of the previous frequency by which that frequency is increased for the next sweep step STEP LOG is usually indicated in percent with the suffix PCT having to be used explicitly If STEP LOG is changed the value of POINts valid for SPACing LOGarithmic also changes according to the formula stated under POINts A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP LOGarithmic Example SOUR2 SWE STEP LOG 5PCT RST value is 1 PCT 1104 3430 12 6 43 E 1 STATus SMR STATus System This system contains the commands for the status reporting system c f Section Status Reporting System RST has no influence on the status registers Command Parameters Default Remark Unit STATus OPERation EVENt Query only CONDition Query only PTRansition 0 to 32767 NTRansition 0 to 32767 ENABle 0 to 32767 PRESet No query QUEStionable EVENt Query only CONDition Query only PTRansition 0 to 32767 NTRansition 0 to 32767 ENABle 0 to 32767 QUEue NEXT Query only STATus OPERation The commands for the STATus OPERation register are under this node STATus OPERation EVENt The command queries the content of tne EVENt part of the STATus OPERation register In reading out the content of the EVEN part is deleted Example STAT OPER EVEN Answer 17 STATus OPERation CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the
162. e help panel can be exited by means of the BACK key Help Menu After calling the Help menu access can be made to any desired help text via an index Operation is analogous to menu operation gt Use the rotary knob to set the menu cursor to the desired key word gt Press the SELECT key gt The information on the marked key word is displayed gt Press the BACK key to exit the menu Status The SMR has a STATUS page which provides an overview of all instrument settings The settings are displayed in abbreviated form The STATUS page is called by pressing the STATUS key Return to the previous menu is made with the BACK key 10 000 000 0000 che 20 0 dem OFF Fm OFF Of LI CF OFF OFF Mom Ur Unlocked Fig 4 47 STATUS menu 1104 3430 12 4 56 E 1 SMR Brief Instructions 5 Remote Control Basic Information This chapter provides basic information on remote control for example on the IEC IEEE bus RS 232 C interface interface and device messages command processing status reporting system etc The instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 and two RS 232 C interfaces The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit to connect a controller for remote control The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aim
163. e of stop frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ STOP 5GHz Input value of center frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ CENT 3GHz Input value of span IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FREQ SPAN 4Hz Display of current frequency value In Step mode input value of frequency Selection of linear or logarithmic sweep IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE SPAC LIN Input value of step size Depending on whether Spacing Lin or Log is selected Step Lin or Step Log is displayed IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE STEP LIN 1MHz Input value of dwell time per step IEC IEEE bus command SOUR SWE DWE 15ms Selection of sweep mode IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE MODE AUTO TRIG SOUR SING Sets the start frequency IEC IEEE bus command ABOR Starts a single sweep This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG Input value of frequency for the selected marker IEC IEEE bus command SOUR MARK1 FREQ 10GHz Switching on off selected marker IEC IEEE bus command SOUR MARK1 OFF Switching on off selected amplitude marker Off Amplitude marker is switched off On Amplitude marker is switched on The output level is reduced by 1 dB on attaining the marker IEC IEEE bus command SOUR MARK1 AMPL OFF 4 30 E 1 SMR Level Sweep Settings for level sweeps can be made in the Sweep Level menu Menu selection
164. e see United Kingdom Eastronics Ltd Measurement Products 11 Rozanis St P 0 Box 39300 Tel Aviv 61392 J M Moss Engineering Ltd Communications Products 9 Oded Street P 0 Box 967 52109 Ramat Gan Rohde amp Schwarz Italia S p a Centro Direzionale Lombardo Via Roma 108 20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI Rohde 8 Schwarz Italia S p a Via Tiburtina 1182 00156 Roma siehe see Mexico Rohde amp Schwarz Japan K K okyo Office 711 Bldg Room 501 5th floor 7 11 18 Nishi Shinjuku Shinjuku ku okyo 160 00023 Rohde amp Schwarz Japan K K Shin Yokohama Office M Daiichi Bldg 8F 2 13 13 Kouhoku ku Yokohama shi anagawa 222 0033 Rohde amp Schwarz Japan K K Osaka Office EK Dai 2 Bldg 8F 13 20 Esaka shi Suita shi Osaka fu 564 0063 Jabal Amman Second Circle Youssef Ezzideen Street P 0 Box 830414 Amman 11183 Jordan Crown Engineering amp Trading Co Tel 91 22 26 30 18 10 Fax 91 22 26 73 20 81 rsindiam rsnl net Tel 62 21 252 36 08 Fax 62 21 252 36 07 sales rsbj rohde schwarz com services rsbj rohde schwarz com Tel 98 21 872 42 96 Fax 98 21 871 90 12 alfred korff rsd rohde schwarz com Tel 972 3 645 87 77 Fax 972 3 645 86 66 david_hasky easx co il Tel 972 3 631 20 57 Fax 972 3 631 40 58 jmmoss zahav net il Tel 39 02 95 70 41 Fax 39 02 95 30 27 72 rsi info rsi rohde schwarz com Tel 39 06 41 59 81 Fax 39
165. ection Delete 11 000000 0000 che 20 0 dem List Delete Delete At Execute Back A Fig 3 9 Delete editing function Delete At Input of first element to be deleted in a list Range Number of elements to be deleted Execute Starts the deletion After the execution of the function the menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1104 3430 12 3 13 E 1 Save Recall SMR SAVE RECALL Storing Calling of Instrument Settings 50 complete instrument settings can be stored in memory locations 1 to 50 Operating Steps Explanations DATA INPUT Store current instrument setting in er memory location 12 b a ewen Bm DATA INPUT Call instrument setting of memory location 12 Be Se The digital display during a save or recall entry is faded in a window Memory location 0 has a special function Here the instrument setting which was current prior to the last memory recall and prior to a preset setting is automatically stored This permits the resetting of instrument settings which have inadvertently been deleted using Recall 0 If an instrument setting is stored in which a sweep was switched on the sweep is started using the recall The parameter Exclude From Recall in the Frequency and Level Level menus determines whether the saved RF frequency and RF level are loaded when an instrument setting is loaded or whether the current settings are maintained Store IEC bus command SAV 12 Call IEC bus command RCL
166. eeeaas 5 19 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register GE 5 19 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register DPE 5 20 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 5 20 STATus OPERation Register cc ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeseeeseeeeess 5 21 STATus QUEStionable Hegister nan nanr cnn rn cnn 5 21 Use of Status Reporting System oooonnnccinnccnnncccnoncnoconnnonaconannnnnnnn cnn nn nan cnn nc cra nana ranma 5 22 Service Request Making Use of Hierarchy Structure oooocconocccccononccccanoncnccnnannnncnnos 5 22 Serial Poll oca can 5 22 Parallel P ll Hrn tia 5 23 Query by Means of Commande mann rra nens 5 23 Error Queue QUERY Ei dt lia 5 23 Reset Values of Status Reporting System uersnssssnsnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen 5 24 Iert ees eege EE 5 25 IEG IEEE Bus Interface 2 2 22 MI d e ae a Bee 5 25 Characteristics of Interface ae 5 25 BUS Eines AH E ee been 5 25 Interf ce FUNCTIONS coito dia api ne ana ren ID EENS 5 26 Interface Messages uumn44400nmnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnannunnnonnnnnnnannennnnonnennnnnnnnnnnannnnnn 5 27 EEN 5 28 Characteristics of Interface ccceecceceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeeeenees 5 28 Signal NEE 5 28 Transmission Parameiers A 5 29 Interface FUNCION Str TA is aerate ieee eege 5 29 Handshake E 5 30 6 Remote Control Descr
167. een entered the lock is deactivated IEC IEEE bus command SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 1104 3430 12 4 47 E 1 Utilities SMR Calibration Calib The Utilities Calib menu offers access to calibration routines and correction values for the purpose of servicing Menu selection Utilities Calib 10 000 0000000 oul 20 0 dem Dtilitie s Calib Ref Osc Leuel Mainboard Ligen Loopgain Back e Fig 4 39 Utilities Calib menu preset setting Utilities Calib RefOsc see service manual instrument Level see service manual instrument MainboardB see service manual instrument Lfgen see service manual instrument Loopgain see service manual instrument Note Run calibration routines only when the instrument has warmed up The calibration routines RefOsc Level MainboardB Lfgen and Loopgain are described in the service manual for the instrument 1104 3430 12 4 48 E 1 SMR Utilities Display of Module Versions Diag Config The versions and modification states of the modules installed can be displayed for servicing purposes The modules can be displayed in the Utilities Diag Config menu Menu selection Utilities Diag Config 10 000 0000000 che 20 0 dem Utilities Diag Config Fig 4 40 Utilities Diag Config menu IEC IEEE bus command DIAG INFO MOD For further information see Service Manual Instrument 1104 3430 12 4 49 E 1 Utilities SMR Display of Voltages of Test Points Diag
168. eiruchons reae u 3 1 e 9 25 et 5 25 language 4 45 en EE 7 1 setting of address 5 3 dE as een 1 10 4 22 6 10 Impedance RF oumput nenn 6 11 E 1 SMR Indication GOERENS 6 45 modules 6 8 operating time Counier nino 6 8 remote control 5 3 5 4 RF OR Fern diari SE 4 9 software version G SUDDICSSION Obi EE ees EES deed eeng 4 45 INF de ebe dE Eesen 5 10 el EE 1 2 Initialization OO ege AAA EE 7 1 IEA 2222222222 950 Eesen LA Input COrreclion ai A 3 6 EXTALG EE 1 7 EXT1 2 frequency lic SES AA 1 10 4 22 6 10 EE 3 5 modulations overview PUESE xiii REF illa exci di soi iii 1 9 4 46 REA A Ate A EE 1 11 E A rene 4 47 TRIG STOP 1 11 4 35 4 39 TRIGGER EE 6 55 Heeler 5 13 Input impedance EXT J2 are seien aan 4 13 4 14 6 14 6 19 pulse generator rte 5 13 Insert Rn EE 3 9 Instrument states reset nennen nes linie 6 50 Instrument setting commands transmission TEE 7 2 Instrument settings Call ars tas ieee ene ise t 3 14 reading out SE DL MOL aa di 3 14 Interface functions IEC IEEE bus 5 26 functions RS 232 C occoociconicicacinocicanccananoncnnnrncnrnonenann 5 29 IECAHEEE E 5 25 messages IEC IEEE bus 5 27 SE ae 1 10 5 28 Internal reterence nr rara 4 46 et 5 19 Inverted COMIMAS ccoooooococonacnononancnnnonanenaconaconannn nana nonanananonos 5 12 IST Hag A eean e
169. elftest Device specific refer to functions depending on the features of the commands instrument such as frequency setting A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI committee Device responses are messages the instruments sends to the controller in reply to a query They may contain measurement results or information on the instrument status The structure and syntax of device messages are described in the following section 1104 3430 12 5 5 E 1 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages SMR Structure and Syntax of Device Messages Introduction to SCPI SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments describes a standard command set for programming instruments irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer The objective of the SCPI consortium is to standardize the device specific commands to a large extent For this purpose a model was developed which defines identical functions of a device or of different devices Command systems were generated which are assigned to these functions Thus it is possible to address identical functions with identical commands The command systems are of a hierarchical structure Fig 5 1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SOURce which operates the signal sources of the devices The other examples concerning syntax and structure of the commands are derived from this command system SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488 2 ie it uses the s
170. ements to be inserted Start Frequency Input of start value for the frequency Increment Frequency Input of increment between two successive frequency values If 0 is entered as an increment identical values will be inserted Power Input of start value for the power Increment Power Input of increment between two successive power values If 0 is entered as an increment identical values will be inserted Execute Starts the insertion After the execution of the function the menu cursor goes back to Edit List 1104 3430 12 3 10 E 1 SMR List Editor Fill editing function see Fig 3 7 The Fill function overwrites a parameter with constant or linearly increasing decreasing values within a defined range If the BACK key is pressed the editing window will be exited without any change being made If the fill range extends beyond the end of the list the list is automatically extended Filling of a list is done in the same way as the insertion of elements in a list see Insert editing function Selection Fill 100 000 0000 wl 10 0 dem SS RC Fill At 0001 Range 0004 Farameter Frequency Start Frequency 100 0000000 MHz Increment Frequency 0 0 Hz Execute Back y Fig 3 7 Fill editing function Fill At Input of start index Range Number of elements to be included Parameter Selection of parameters frequency power to be filled This menu option is not offered if a list contains only elements with one parameter
171. en Delay e 6 33 pulse modulaton nn 4 15 4 23 6 33 Delete List eise Eed 3 8 List entry Detector power confrolt e 29 Deviation Device model IEC IEEE bus 5 13 E 1 Index Device r amp ESDonSeS ur suiunssnnenssnsnsesssnsnsnnnannsssnnenssnenssnnenn 5 5 Device Dependent Error bit 5 20 Digit CUIS Of A a Ai 3 1 Digital modulation DM 6 17 Disable INGICATIONS AAA 4 45 Display attenuator operating ckcles nenn 4 51 CONTIOS El oonicici ntanicicacicnici n 4 42 design 3 1 MODUS ici nalen ern A 49 operating hours coumter conan 4 51 Serial NUIMDOM des Seed ed 4 51 Software version nenn 4 51 voltage of test points uuueesensnernenrnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 4 50 Double pulse iii 4 16 4 23 6 33 Dwell list tad iaa 6 25 MSOG EE 6 49 Dwell time frequency Sweep cono nonnnnnnanonancannnno 6 35 level SWE Dera ansehen 6 36 Edge external trigger PULSE input 4 16 4 24 6 55 TRIGGER Input 6 55 Edit deene 3 9 EMG Asia Ran 1 1 ENABIe part Envelope cooooocicccnn o v i 4 elen RTE 5 9 EPROM testa enrenar anue d rA N N Eai 4 52 Error messages 6 50 9 2 device specific ER 9 1 SGCPlepechfie ANEREN 9 2 Lee 6 45 6 48 E EE 5 23 Error Queue Not Empty Dit 5 19 EE STEHE 5 19 ESE event status enable register n enen 5 20 ESR event status register ene 5 20 EVENE Dart een Ran 5 17 Event status register EH
172. en If system security is activated using command SYSTem SECurity ON the display cannot be switched on and off arbitrarily cf below Command Parameter Default Remark Unit DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF AMPLitude ON OFF FREQuency ON OFF DISPlay ANNotation The commands determining whether frequency and amplitude are indicated are under this node Caution With SYSTem SECurity ON the indications cannot be switched from OFF to ON In this case RST does not influence the ANNotation settings either With SYSTem SECurity OFF the RST value is ON for all ANNotation parameters DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF The command switches the frequency and amplitude indication on or off Command DISP ANN ALL ON can only be executed if SYST SEC is set to OFF Example DISP ANN ALL ON With SyST SEC OFF RST value is ON DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude ON OFF The command switches on or off the amplitude indication Command DISP ANN AMPL ON can only be executed if SYST SEC is set to OFF Example DISP ANN AMPL ON With SyST SEC OFF RST value is ON DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency ON OFF The command switches on or off the frequency indication Command DISP ANN FREQ ON can only be executed if SYST SEC is set to OFF Example DISP ANN FREQ ON With sYST SEC OFF RST value is ON 1104 3430 12 6 9 E 1 INPut MEMory SMR INPut System This system contains the comma
173. en Occupied space Len 010 for example means that the current list occupies 10 elements in the list memory RF ON OFF Key The RF output signal can be switched on and off with the RF ON OFF key This does not influence the current menu When the output signal is switched off RF Off appears in the header field with the level display With RF Off the 50 source impedance is maintained IEC IEEE bus command OUTP OFF 1104 3430 12 4 9 E 1 Modulation General SMR Modulation General In addition to pulse modulation PULSE the SMR offers the following modulation types if it is fitted with the option SMR B5 e linear and logarithmic amplitude modulation AM e frequency modulation FM digital modulation types ASK and FSK For the analog modulation types internal or external modulation sources can be used For the digital modulation types only external modulation sources can be used Modulation Sources Internal modulation source For AM and FM an internal modulation generator Lfgen is available For more information see section LF Generator For internal pulse modulation the instrument can be equipped with a pulse generator option SMR B14 For more information see section Pulse Generator External modulation source The input connectors to be used for feeding the various types of external modulation are listed in Table 4 1 External AM and FM can be AC or DC coupled Table 4 1 Input connectors for
174. ency Response 1E6 for 1 MHz 4 Truth values Boolean parameters are returned as 0 for Off and 1 for On Example OUTPut STATe Response 1 5 Text character data is returned in a short form Example SOURce FM SOURce Response INT1 1104 3430 12 5 9 E 1 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages SMR Parameters Most commands require a parameter to be specified Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The parameter type required for a given command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description Numerical values Special numerical values MIN MAX DEF UP DOWN INF NINF NAN Boolean Parameters Text 1104 3430 12 Numerical values can be entered in any form ie with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must be in the value range 32 000 to 32 000 The exponent is preceded by an E or e Specifying the exponent alone is not permissible In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHz being also permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If no unit is entered the basic unit is used Example SOURce FREQuency 1 5 kHz SOURce FRE
175. ened by omitting optional key words Example SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 1 This command immediately sets the offset of the signal to 1 V The following command has the same effect POWer OFFSet 1 Note An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified in greater detail by means of a numerical suffix Key words have a long form and a short form Either the long form or the short form may be entered other abbreviations are not permissible Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 STAT QUES ENAB 1 Note The short form is characterized by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Upper case and lower case notation only serve the above purpose the device itself does not make any difference between upper case and lower case letters 5 7 E 1 Structure and Syntax of Device Messages SMR Parameters Numerical suffix 1104 3430 12 A parameter must be separated from the header by a white space If a command includes several parameters they are separated by a comma Some queries permit the parameters MINimum MAXimum and DEFault to be entered For a description of these parameter types see section Parameters Example SOURce POWer ATTenuation MAXimum Response 60 This query requests the maximum value for the attenuation If a device has several functions or features of the same kind eg inputs the desired function can be selected by append
176. ere is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the danger 7 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make certain that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to handle operating the products otherwise injuries or material damage may occur lt is the responsibility of the employer to select suitable personnel for operating the products 8 Prior to switching on the product it must be ensured that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 9 In the case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with earthing contact and protective earth connection 1171 0000 42 02 00 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use If the product has no power switch for disconnection from the AC supply the plug of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting dev
177. ered on principle with the trigger certainly being able to be set to free run using TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO as well Command Parameters eg Remark SOURce PULSe Option SMR B14 DELay 20 ns to 1 3 s s DOUBle DEL av 60 ns to 1 3 s s STATe ON OFF PERiod 100 ns to 85s s WIDTh 20 ns to 1 3 s s SOURce PULSe DELay 20 ns to 1 3 s The command specifies the time from the start of the period to the first edge of the pulse Due to the construction of the instrument this parameter is set to 0 if SOUR PULS DOUB STAT is set to ON The old value is activated again as soon as the double pulse has been switched off Example SOUR PULS DEL 10us RST value is 1 us SOURce PULSe DOUBle The commands to check the second pulse are under this node If SOUR PULS DOUB STAT is set to ON a second pulse whose width is identical to the first pulse is generated in every period SOURce PULSe DOUBle DELay 60 ns to 1 3 s The command sets the delay time from the start of the pulse period to the first edge of the second pulse Example SOUR PULS DOUB DEL 10us RST value is 1 us SOURce PULSe DOUBle STATe ON OFF The command switches the second pulse on or off ON The second pulse is switched on Parameter SOUR PULS DEL is set to 0 and cannot be changed WIDTh gt PULS PER PULS DOUB DEL 2 results in error message 221 Settings conflict OFF The second pulse is switched off Example
178. erix marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it ASCI character introduces block data A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates header and parameter 1104 3430 12 5 12 E 1 SMR Instrument Model and Command Processing Instrument Model and Command Processing The instrument model shown in Fig 5 2 was created with a view to the processing of IEC IEEE bus Commande The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of messages Input unit IEC IEEE gt with bus input buffer y Command recognition y Data set Status reporting system p Instrument hardware v IEC IEEE 4 Output unit bus with output buffer Fig 5 2 Device model for remote control via the IEC IEEE bus Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC IEEE bus and stores them in the input buffer The input buffer has a size of 256 characters The input unit sends a message to the command recognition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a terminator lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR as defined in IEEE 488 2 or the interface message DCL If the input buffer is full the IEC IEEE bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed After this the IEC IEEE bus traffic i
179. ers A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These key words are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these key words has to be indicated in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the key words is indicated Example SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands of identical meaning can be formed They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal to 1 kHz SOURce FREQuency CW 1E3 SOURce FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command is different depending on which parameter is entered Example Selection of the parameters for the command SOURce COUPling AC DC If parameter AC is selected only the AC content is fed through in the case of DC the DC as well as the AC content Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header cf Chapter 5 Section Optional Key The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either not at all once or several times 6 2 E 1 SMR Common Commands Common Commands The common commands
180. es de distribuci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de como m ximo 16 A Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente Si no tiene en consideraci n estas indicaciones se arriesga a que se originen chispas fuego y o heridas No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables de extensi n o los enchufes de extensi n ya que esto pudiera causar fuego o golpes de corriente En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n de entrada de Ueff gt 30 V se deber tomar las precauciones debidas para impedir cualquier peligro por ejemplo medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc En caso de conexi n con aparatos de la t cnica inform tica se deber tener en cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de la EC950 EN60950 Nunca abra la tapa o parte de ella si el producto est en funcionamiento Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar heridas fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un lugar se deber primero conectar el conductor protector fijo con el conductor protector del aparato antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efecutadas por un electricista especializado 1171 0000 42 02 00 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 En caso de
181. eteeeteeeteetneeeeeeseeene 4 33 6 41 marker 4 33 6 41 start frequency 4 32 6 39 step SiZze 4 32 6 43 stop frequency 4 32 6 39 Sweep mode 4 32 Sweep mode 6 43 List Dell ici ta dada 3 8 dwell List dwell Mseq Eb sesch Ee error messages external ligQET oooncocinccnnccconconccanonononnoncncnrenoranonnnnnns 4 35 E 1 Index frequency ist 6 25 instrument states Meeg nenn nennen 6 49 levels aaa ame un 6 26 level correction Ucor 4 8 6 15 managment cisien iipon RT 7 3 Memory SEQUENCE cents ecenteeeeeteeeeeeeesenneeess 4 38 mode 6 26 6 31 6 53 6 54 SCC EE EE 3 8 List entry Delete nun ei ee 3 13 INS ee antenne ee 3 9 List modenas le a REENEN 4 34 el 4 36 example 4 35 MOQUONCY cuca iia 4 34 ele ee 4 35 LEE E 4 34 manual processing Of liSt cccccccssecesseeeeteessteeees 4 34 Operating modes 220 22244n0nrnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnannrannnnnnn 4 34 LOCK leve cada Aa rei 4 47 Long form commands SE Lower case notation eommandel nennen 5 7 Ee 8 1 IE E EE 5 10 Manual control tele 7 2 Manual operation FEIUFN TO ea 5 4 Marker LE nee 6 41 E 6 27 MARKER OUtPUt iriiria aniier aa eas 4 27 4 35 6 41 MAV Dilo aia iaa 5 19 Maximum value Gommanmch l ernennen 5 9 5 10 Memory LOCOS ciao ti dni 3 14 6 10 Memory CMOG HAM 1 2 Memory list Mseq Memory sequence dwel Eer 4 38
182. external modulation Inputs Modulation EXT1 EXT2 PULSE AM x FM1 x x FM2 x x PULSE x ass Tx FSK x 1104 3430 12 4 10 E 1 SMR Modulation General External modulation signals should have a voltage of Vp 1 V Vims 0 707 V to maintain the displayed modulation depth or deviation Voltage deviations exceeding 3 are displayed in the status line as shown in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Status messages for deviation from nominal at external modulation inputs Message Deviation EXT1 HIGH Voltage at EXT1 too high EXT1 LOW Voltage at EXT1 too low EXT2 HIGH Voltage at EXT2 too high EXT2 LOW Voltage at EXT2 too low EXT HI HI Voltages at EXT1 and EXT2 too high EXT LO LO Voltages at EXT1 and EXT2 too low EXT HI LO Voltage at EXT1 too high and at EXT2 too low EXT LO HI Voltage at EXT1 too low and at EXT2 too high Simultaneous Modulation Basically any combination of AM FM and pulse modulation is possible There are restrictions only for modulations of equal type see Table 4 3 Two tone AM is possible by switching on both the external and the internal source Two tone FM is possible by switching on both FM1 and FM2 For FM1 and FM2 separate deviations can be set and separate sources switched on Note For two tone modulation it should be noted that the selected deviation or modulation depth applies to only one signal in each case and the sum deviation or sum modulation depth results fr
183. field frequency 2 5 GHz D 5 The menu cursor marks the ENTER dB m permanent level indication Reset the menu cursor to the menu BACK field level 10 dBm Operating steps Explanantions T Reset the instrument to the defined E state DATA INPUT Set the frequency to 2 5 GHz 2 5 SE The menu cursor marks the p dBuV permanent frequency indication DATA INPUT Set the level to 10 dBm 1104 3430 12 2 1 E 1 Sample Setting for First Users AM modulation of the output signal The output signal is to be amplitude modulated next AM modulation depth 15 5 AM signal 3 kHz sine SMR Operating steps MENU VARIATION CY MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION SELECT Modulation MENU VARIATION AM Explanations Select menu Modulation using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob The submenu is displayed Select submenu AM Press SELECT key or rotary knob The AM setting menu is displayed MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION SELECT AM Depth DATA INPUT x1 Cied E MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION SELECT AM Source 1104 3430 12 2 2 Select parameter AM Depth using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob The menu cursor marks the setting value Enter modulation depth 15 5 and acknowledge using x1 Enter key Reset menu cursor to AM Depth using BACK key Select AM Source using rotary knob Press SELECT
184. ge is displayed Menu selection Modulation AM 10 0000000000 ch AM Source Scan State 1 0000 kHz sin Fig 4 10 Modulation AM menu preset setting AM Depth Input value of modulation depth IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM 30PCT AM Source Selection of modulation source IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM SOUR INT1 STAT ON Scan State Switching on off logarithmic amplitude modulation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM SCAN ON Ext1 Coupling Selection of AC or DC coupling with external modulation source IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM EXT1 COUP AC Ext2 Coupling Selection of AC or DC coupling with external modulation source IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM EXT2 COUP AC Ext1 Impedance Selection of input impedance for external input EXT 1 IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM EXT1 IMP 100kOhm Ext2 Impedance Selection of input impedance for external input EXT2 IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM EXT2 IMP 100kOhm Lfgen Freq Selection of frequency of LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR AM INT FREQ 1kHz Lfgen Shape Selection of waveform of LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FUNC SIN 1104 3430 12 4 13 E 1 Analog Modulation SMR Frequency Modulation Settings for frequency modulation can be made in the Modulation FM menu Menu selection Modulation FM 10 000 000 0000 ch FM Deviation 10 0000 kHz Off AC AL 100 Kse 100 Kee 1 0000 kHz Sin Fig 4 11 Modulati
185. ged Storing and Packing The instrument can be stored at a temperature of 40 C to 70 C When stored for an extended period of time the instrument should be protected against dust The original packing should be used particularly the protective covers at the front and rear when the instrument is to be transported or dispatched If the original packing is no longer available use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and carefully wrap the instrument to protect it against mechanical damage 1104 3430 12 8 1 E 1 SMR Error Messages 9 Error Messages The present chapter contains the error messages short term and long term messages of the SMR Short term message The short term message is displayed in the status line Part of it overwrites the status indications and disappears after approx 2 seconds or in the case of a new entry The instrument shows e g short term messages if the attempt is made to enter an overrange or if incompatible operating modes deactivate one another Long term message The long term message is displayed in the status line by means of the message WARNING or ERROR Pressing the ERROR key calls the ERROR page in which the messages are entered Several messages can be entered at the same time The long term message remains existing until there is no cause any more The ERROR page is exited using the BACK key The instrument displays e g the long term message ERROR if there is a hardware erro
186. gers exactly one entire sweep cycle MANual Each level step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a SOUR POW MAN command the trigger system is not active The level increases or decreases depending on the direction of the shaft encoder by the value stated under SOUR POW STEP INCR STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The level increases by the value indicated under SOUR POW STEP INCR Example SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO RST value is AUTO SOURce SWEep POWer SPACing LOGarithmic The command defines that the sweep steps have logarithmic spacings It permits the query of SPACing Example SOUR SWE POW SPAC LOG RST value is LOGarithmic SOURce SWEep POWer STEP The commands to set the step width for the sweep are under this node SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic 0 to 160 dB The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next level value of a sweep is calculated according to new level previous level STEP LOG x previous level STEP LOG denotes the fraction of the previous level by which this is increased for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is entered in units of dB with suffix dB having to be specified explicitly If STEP LOG is changed the value of POINts also changes according to the formula indicated under POINts A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP LOG Keyword LOG can
187. he instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should therefore set the instrument such that a service request is triggered in the event of a malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request A detailed example of a service request routine is included in chapter 7 Programming Examples Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is implemented by means of interface messages and is therefore clearly faster The serial poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard method for different instruments to query the status byte The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI nor to IEEE 488 2 The QuickBASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP Serial polling is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the states of several instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus 1104 3430 12 5 22 E 1 SMR Status Reporting System Parallel Poll In a parallel poll up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines ie to set the data line allocated to each instrument to logically 0 or 1 Analogously to the SRE register which determines under what conditions an SRQ is generated there is a parallel poll enable PPE register which is likewise ANDed with the STB
188. he level The RF output level is the sum of both values Level Ucor output level If an offset is selected at the same time the displayed level value is the difference between the amplitude and the offset entered in the Level menu Amplitude offset level With automatic level correction the Ucor lists can be automatically filled with measured values User correction is active in all operating modes when switched on Menu selection Level Ucor 10 000 000 0000 cz Fig 4 8 Level Ucor menu State Switching on off user correction IEC IEEE bus command SOUR CORR ON Select List Selection of a list or generation of a new list see chapter 3 section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SOUR CORR CSET UCOR1 Delete List Deletion of a list see chapter 3 section List Editor IEC IEEE bus command SOUR CORR CSET DEL UCOR2 Edit List Selection of editing mode for modifying a selected list see chapter 3 section List Editor IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREO 10 5GHz 10 7GHz SOUR CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 1 9dB 1 2dB 1104 3430 12 4 8 E 1 SMR RF Level Menu selection Level Ucor 0007 TO 6000000000 GHz 1o 7000000000 GHz 0003 710 5000000000 GHz Fig 4 9 Ucor Level menu Ucor Indication of list item number Free Available space Free 150 for example means that there is free space for a total of 150 pairs of values elements in the list memory L
189. hest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Example SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC This command is at the fourth level of the SOURce system It selects AC coupling of the external signal source 1104 3430 12 5 6 E 1 SMR Structure and Syntax of Device Messages POLarity INTernal EXTernal POLarity COUPling Fig 5 1 Tree structure of SCPI command systems using the SOURce system as an example Optional key words Long and short form 1104 3430 12 Some key words occur at several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the structure of the command that is to say at what position of the header of a command they are inserted Example SOURce FM POLarity NORMal This command contains the key word POLarity at the third command level It defines the polarity between the modulator and the modulation signal Example SOURce FM EXTernal POLarity NORMal This command contains the key word POLarity at the fourth command level It defines the polarity between the modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the external signal source indicated Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted These key words are marked in the description by square brackets The instrument must recognize the full command length for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands can be considerably short
190. i d acheter un produit Rohde amp Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apres les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d veloppement la fabrication et les tests respectent nos normes de ges tion qualit Le systeme de gestion qualit de Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu conform ment aux normes DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 1996 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your Rohde amp Schwarz equipment always up to date please subscribe to our electronic newsletter at http www rohde schwarz com www response nsf newsletterpreselection or request the desired information and upgrades via email from your Customer Support Center addresses see below Feedback We want to know if we are meeting your support needs If you have any comments please email us and let us know CustomerSupport Feedback rohde schwarz com USA amp Canada Monday to Friday except US public holidays 8 00 AM 8 00 PM Eastern Standard Time EST Tel from USA 888 test rsa 888 837 8772 opt 2
191. ic INFO OTIMe not SCPI 6 8 DIAGnostic INFO SDATe not SCPI 6 8 DIAGnostic MEASure POINt DISPlay ANNotation ALL ON OFF ON OFF DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude not SCP Les 6 9 6 9 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency ON OFF INPut IF STATe ON OFF 6 9 6 10 MEMory NSTates 6 10 OUTPut1 2 3 AMODe AUTO FIXed notSCPI 6 11 OUTPut1 ATTenuation 0 to 110 dB not SCPI 6 11 OUTPutt 2 3 IMPedance 6 11 OUTPut3 POLarity PULSe NORMal INVerse 6 12 OUTPutt 2 3 SCALe 0 511 6 12 OUTPut3 SOURce OFF PULSegen VIDeo 6 12 oUTPut1j2 3 STATe ON OFF 6 12 OUTPut1 2 3 STATe PON OFF UNCHanged not SCPI 6 12 OUTPutt 2 3VOLTage 0Vto4V not scht les SOURce AM DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT SOURce AM EXTernal1 2 COUPling AC DC 6 13 6 14 SOURce AM EXTernal1 2 Impedance SOURce AM INTernal FREQuency 600 Ohm 100 kOhm 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 6 14 6 14 SOURce AM SOURce INTernal EXT2 0 1 to 10 dB V SOURce AM SCAN SENSitivity 6 14 6 14 SOURce AM SCAN STATe OFF ON 6 14 6 14 SOURce AM STATe OFF ON SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF 6 15 SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog not SCP 6 15 SOURce CORRection CSET FREE not SCPI 6 15 SOURce CORRection CSET SELect Name of t
192. ice In such cases it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times length of connecting cable approx 2 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply If products without power switches are integrated in racks or systems a disconnecting device must be provided at the system level Never use the product if the power cable is damaged By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by e g tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fused with max 16 A Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket Otherwise this can result in sparks fire and or injuries Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fusing current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment comply with IEC 950 EN 60950 Never remove the cover or part of the housing while you are operating the product This will expose circuits and components an
193. ices connected to the IEC IEEE bus without previous addressing addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in the section Interface Messages below Some control characters are defined for the control of the RS 232 C interface see section Interface Functions Device Messages Commands and Device Responses Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line not being active ASCII code is used The device messages are largely identical for the two interfaces IEC IEEE bus and RS 232 C A distinction is made according to the direction in which device messages are sent on the IEC IEEE bus Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the device functions and request information Commands are subdivided according to two criteria 1 According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as reset of the instrument or setting the output level to 1 V Queries cause data to be provided for output queries on the IEC IEEE bus eg for device identification or polling of the active input 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in standard IEEE 488 2 They refer to functions such as the management of the standardized status registers reset and s
194. if effective for all types of modulation All gt If at least one type of modulation is switched on pressing of the MOD ON OFF key will switch off the modulation s The modulation types previously active are stored If no modulation type is switched on pressing the MOD ON OFF key will switch on the types of modulation last switched off with the MOD ON OFF key If switch on is made with the MOD ON OFF key the modulation sources set in the modulation menus are used The modulation types to be switched on or off with the MOD ON OFF key can be selected in the Utilities ModKey menu Menu selection Utilities ModKey 10 000 000 0000 ch Utilities Mod et Modulation r ET Pulse AM Back 4 om Fig 4 44 Utilities ModKey menu preset setting Modulation Selection of modulation type s for which the MOD ON OFF key is to be effective Note Preset switches off all modulations sets this parameter to All and stores AM 30 as default setting 1104 3430 12 4 53 E 1 Utilities SMR Setting the Auxiliary Inputs Outputs AUX 1 0 Settings for the BLANK output and the V GHz output can be made in the Utilities AuxlO menu For more detailed information see sections Seep List Mode and Memory Sequence Menu selection Utilities AuxlO 10 000 0000000 ch Sweep Blank Time Fig 4 45 Utilities AuxlO menu Sweep Blank Time Selection of blank duration Norm The blank duration is set to the shortest
195. if the product was moved from a cold to a warm environment Do not close any slots or openings on the product since they are necessary for ventilation and prevent the product from overheating Do not place the product on soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or inside a closed housing unless this is well ventilated Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The temperature of the environment must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the data sheet Batteries and storage batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire Keep batteries and storage batteries away from children If batteries or storage batteries are improperly replaced this can cause an explosion warning lithium cells Replace the battery or storage battery only with the 1171 0000 42 02 00 28 29 30 31 32 33 matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see spare parts list Batteries and storage batteries are hazardous waste Dispose of them only in specially marked containers Observe local regulations regarding waste disposal Do not short circuit batteries or storage batteries Please be aware that in the event of a fire toxic substances gases liquids etc that may be hazardous to your health may escape from the product Please be aware of the weight of the product Be careful when moving it otherwise you may injure your back or other parts of your body Do not place the
196. ign Zweigniederlassungen der Rohde amp Tel 86 28 86 52 76 06 Fax 86 28 86 52 76 10 sophia chen rsbp rohde schwarz com Tel 86 29 87 41 53 77 Fax 86 29 87 20 65 00 sherry yu rsbp rohde schwarz com Tel 86 755 82 03 11 98 Fax 86 755 82 03 30 70 Room 1901 Central Business Buildingessica lia rsbp rohde schwarz com Tel 357 24 42 51 78 Fax 357 24 42 46 21 hinis logos cy net Tel 420 2 24 31 12 32 Fax 420 2 24 31 70 43 office rscz rohde schwarz com Tel 45 43 43 66 99 Fax 45 43 43 77 44 rsdk rsdk rohde schwarz com Tel 20 2 455 67 44 Fax 20 2 256 17 40 an_uas link net Tel 372 6 14 31 23 Fax 372 6 14 31 21 estonia rsdk rohde schwarz com Tel 358 207 60 04 00 Fax 358 207 60 04 17 info rsfin rohde schwarz com Tel 33 0 141 36 10 00 Fax 33 0 141 36 11 11 contact rsf rohde schwarz com Tel 33 2 99 51 97 00 Fax 33 2 99 51 98 77 Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH Branch offices of Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH Zweigniederlassung Nord Gesch ftsstelle Berlin Ernst Reuter Platz 10 D 10587 Berlin Postfach 100620 D 10566 Berlin Tel 49 30 34 79 48 0 Fax 49 30 34 79 48 48 info rsv rohde schwarz com Germany Ghana Greece Guatemala Guiana Haiti Honduras Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Zweigniederlassung B ro Bonn Josef Wirmer Stra e 1 3 D 53123 Bonn Postfach 1
197. ilation must not be obstructed during operation Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products prescribed operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X pollution severity 2 overvoltage category 2 use only in enclosed spaces max operation altitude max 2000 m Unless specified otherwise in the data sheet a tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and of 5 to the nominal frequency Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Prior to performing any work on the product or opening the product the 1171 0000 42 02 00 product must be disconnected from the supply network Any adjustments replacements of parts maintenance or repair must be carried out only by technical personnel authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection PE conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens e g nickel such as alumin
198. in select or input windows which open when the current setting is activated Menu cursor The menu cursor shows the user at which position in the menu he is The position of the menu cursor is evident from the inverse notation of the term white characters on a black background Digit cursor As a bright field the digit cursor marks the position which can be varied by means of the rotary knob in a value indication 3 1 E 1 Basic Operating Steps SMR Basic Operating Steps To operate the instrument menus are called in the display All setting possibilities and the current setting status are evident from the menus All settings can be made by accessing the menus RF frequency and RF level can also be set without menu operation using keys FREQ and LEVEL RF signal and modulation can also be switched on off without menu operation using keys RF ON OFF and or MOD ON OFF Calling the menus Accessing the menus is effected using rotary knob VARIATION SELECT key and BACK key Rotary knob Rotary knob VARIATION moves the menu cursor over the positions of a menu level to be selected If a scrollbar is visible at the right hand margin of a menu the menu is larger than the screen window If the menu cursor is moved to the margin of the screen window the covered lines become visible If the rotary knob is pressed after a position has been selected the lower menu level or the respective settings are called The rotary knob hence has
199. ing a suffix to the command Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Example SOURce FM EXTernal2 COUPling AC This command sets the coupling of the second external signal source 5 8 E 1 SMR Structure and Syntax of Device Messages Structure of Command Lines A command line may contain one or several commande It is terminated by lt New Line gt lt New Line gt with EOI or EOI together with the last data byte QuickBASIC automatically produces EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURce POWer CENTer MINimum OUTPut ATTenuation 10 This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the SOURce system and defines the center frequency of the output signal The second command belongs to the OUTPut system and sets the attenuation of the output signal If successive commands belong to the same system and thus have one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon is started with the level that lies below the common levels see also Fig 5 1 The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURce FM MODE LOCKed SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz Th
200. ion and typical settings to users working with the SMR for the first time Chapter 3 describes manual control of the microwave signal generator for example calling up of menus selection and editing of parameters use of the list editor and the SAVE RECALL function This chapter also contains an overview of menus showing the functions available for the instruments and its options Chapter 4 describes the functions of the instrument and its options which can be activated manually via menus or by remote control frequency and level setting analog and digital modulation sweep list mode memory sequence and general functions not directly related to signal generation Chapter 5 provides basic information on remote control for example on the IEC IEEE bus RS232C interface interface and device messages command processing status reporting system etc Chapter 6 contains for each command system an overview and description of all commands available for the instrument and its options as well as an alphabetical list of all commands Chapter 7 includes programming examples for remote control Chapter 8 gives information on preventive maintenance for example for keeping the exterior clean storage etc Chapter 9 contains the SCPI specific and device specific error messages displayed on the instrument Chapier 10 includes the index Service Manual Instrument for Microwave Signal Generator SMR The service manual instrument for Microwave Sig
201. iones Dado el caso de que est integrado un producto de laser en un producto R amp S por ejemplo CD DVD ROM no utilice otras instalaciones o funciones que las descritas en la documentaci n De otra manera pondr en peligro su salud ya que el rayo laser puede da ar irreversiblemente sus ojos Nunca trate de descomponer estos productos Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser p gina 5 Certified Quality System DIN EN ISO 9001 DIN EN 9100 DIN EN ISO 14001 DOS REG NO 001954 QM ST UM QUALITATSZERTIFIKAT Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich fur den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produktes entschie den Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unseres Management systems entwickelt gefertigt und gepr ft Das Rohde amp Schwarz Management system ist zertifiziert nach DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 1996 CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY Dear Customer you have decided to buy a Rohde amp Schwarz product You are thus as sured of receiving a product that is manufactured using the most modern methods available This product was developed manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality manage ment system standards The Rohde amp Schwarz quality manage ment system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 DIN EN 9100 2003 DIN EN ISO 14001 1996 CERTIFICAT DE QUALITE Cher Client vous avez chois
202. iption of CommandsS uuusuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 6 1 Notatlons ge ee EE Ee 6 1 COMMON ee En EE 6 3 ABORIt System z2n 0 ne SEENEN EENS 6 6 DIAN DE EE 6 7 DISPLAY SySte im 2232 Egal ny ran aan Hahn kann ae anaita iaia ih anne 6 9 INPut SyStem 2 22 22 2222 22 is 6 10 MEMory System 2 222 SES 6 10 QUT PUL SyS Taa e Eed 6 11 SOURCE SYSTEMN E 6 13 SOURCE AM Subsystem 2 222 RI RL 6 13 SOURce CORRection Subsystem AA 6 15 SOURce DM SUDSYSLO MT siete ces chee riesen een 6 17 SOURce FM Subsystem 20u4444004n4000nnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnn 6 19 SOURce FREQuency Subsystem 00 0 reee raana paa rada a oei eia odar eda aopa oaa i paek idiei Feia edra aea iat 6 21 SOURce LIST SUbDSYSteM e a a a aa aa a aaa aE aaia EE 6 24 SOURce MARKer Subsystem 2 244044440nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nen 6 27 SOURce POWer SubsystemM u suuuusssunnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn en 6 29 SOURce PULM Gubevstem sence ceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeesaeeseaaesseneeee 6 32 SOURce PULSE Subsystems Aa iR ie 6 33 SOURCe ROSCillator SUDSYStOM nenn 6 34 SOURce SWEep Subsystem eeeceecee cece eeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeee sense seaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeteeeees 6 35 1104 3430 12 6 E 1 SMR Contents SOURCE2 SYSIEM E 6 38 SOURce2 FREQuency Subsystem uuuuuenesssensnsenennnnnnnnn
203. is command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon The two commands belong to the SOURce command system subsystem FM ie they have two common levels To abbreviate the command line the second command is started with the level below SOURce FM The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows CALL IBWRT generators SOURce FM MODE LOCKed INTernal FREQuency 1kHz However a new command line always has to be started with the complete path Example CALL IBWRT generator SOURce FM MODE LOCKed CALL IBWRT generators SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz Responses to Queries For each setting command a query is defined unless explicitly specified otherwise The query is formed by adding a question mark to the setting command in question Responses to queries to the SCPI standard are partly subject to stricter rules than responses to the IEEE 488 2 standard 1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example SOURce EXTernal COUPling Response AC 2 Maximum values minimum values and all further quantities requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values Example FREQuency MAX Response 10E3 3 Numerical values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set with the Unit command Example FREQu
204. is message is output if the error queue contains no entries Command Error errored command sets bit 5 in the ESR register Error code 1104 3430 12 Error text with queue poll Explanation of error Command error The command is errored or invalid Invalid character The command contains an invalid character Example A header contains an ampersand SOURCE amp Syntax error The command is invalid Example A command contains block data which the instrument does not accept Invalid separator The command contains an illegal character instead of a terminator Example A semicolon after the command is missing Data type error The command contains an invalid value information Example ON is entered instead of a numerical value for frequency setting GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET is entered within a command line Parameter not allowed The command contains too many parameters Example The command SoURce FM INTernal FREQuency allows for a frequency entry only Missing parameter The command contains too few parameters Example The command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency requires a frequency entry 9 2 E 1 SMR Error Messages Command Error continued Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than 12 characters 113 Undefined header The header i
205. ither be indicated as a list of numbers separated by commas of arbitrary length or as binary block data In the case of block data transmission always 8 4 bytes are interpreted as a floating point number of double accuracy Example SOUR LIST FREQ 14GHz 13GHz 12GHz SOURce LIST FREQuency POINts The command queries the length in items of the FREQuency part of the list presently selected The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST FREQ POIN Answer 327 1104 3430 12 6 25 E 1 SOURce LIST SMR SOURce LIST MODE AUTO STEP The command indicates the mode in which the list is to be processed by analogy with SOUR SWE MODE AUTO Each trigger event triggers a complete list run STEP Each trigger event triggers only one step in processing the list Example SOUR LIST MODE STEP RST value is AUTO SOURce LIST POWer 130 to 25 dBm 130 to 25 dBm Block data 20 to 25 dBm without Option SMR B15 The command fills the POWer part of the RF list selected with data The data can either be indicated as a list of numbers Separated by commas of arbitrary length or as binary block data As to the format of the data cf command SOUR LIST FREO RST does not influence data lists Example SOUR LIST POW OdBm 2dBm 2dBm 3dBm SOURce LIST POWer POINts The command queries the length in items of the LEVel part of the list presently se
206. iven The frequency modulator cannot generate the set frequency deviation Pulse input signal missing No pulse input signal available 140 This modulation forces other modulations OFF A modulation has been switched on which cannot be used at the same time as an already active modulation The previous modulation has been switched off The input voltage at the EXT2 socket is too low Oven cold The reference oscillator has not yet reached its operating temperature 171 152 Input voltage out of range EXT1 too high The input voltage at the EXT1 socket is too high 153 Input voltage out of range EXT1 too low The input voltage at the EXT1 socket is too low 154 Input voltage out of range EXT2 too high The input voltage at the EXT2 socket is too high 155 Input voltage out of range EXT2 too low 1104 3430 12 9 6 E 1 SMR Error Messages Continuation Device dependent Error Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 180 Calibration failed Calibration could not be executed 181 REF OSC calibration data not used because ADJUSTMENT STATE is ON The reference oscillator calibration data are not used as long as ADJUSTMENT STATE is activated 184 Calibration data missing Calibration data are missing in the device memory The calibration data have to be generated first by an internal or external calibration or to be loaded into the device
207. key or rotary knob d N a The frequency setting menu is d I displayed MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select parameter Frequency Press SELECT key or rotary knob The menu cursor marks the setting Frequency SELECT value Enter frequency 4 2 GHz a Press SELECT key or rotary knob 4 2 d The menu cursor is set back to dBuV Frequency DATA INPUT MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Knob Step User using rotary knob Select parameter Knob Step User Press SELECT key or rotary knob Enter step width 12 kHz DATA INPUT JJJ EI Press SELECT key or rotary knob The menu cursor is set back to Knob Step User 1104 3430 12 2 4 E 1 SMR Sample Setting for First Users Operating steps Explanations MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select parameter Knob Step using rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob A pop up menu displays the available settings MENU VARIATION MENU VARIATION Select User user defined step width using rotary knob This results in step width 12 kHz User being used in the case of variation using the rotary knob Press SELECT key or rotary knob The menu cursor is set back to Knob Step Decimal Exclude from Recall OFF Back A Fig 2 2 Display for pattern setting 1104 3430 12 25 E 1 SMR Design of the Display 3 Manual Operation This chapter shows the design of the display and des
208. l Normal or Inverse can be selected IEC IEEE bus command OUTP POL PULS NORM Pulse Period Input value of pulse period IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS PER 10us Pulse Width Input value of pulse width IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS WIDT 1us Pulse Delay Input value of single pulse delay This value is indicated only if Double Pulse State is setto Off IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DEL lus Double Pulse State Switching on off double pulse On Double pulse is switched on Off Single pulse IEC IEEE bus command SOUR PULS DOUB OFF 1104 3430 12 4 23 E 1 PULSE VIDEO Output SMR Pulse Mode Ext Trig Slope Gate Input Polarity Ext Impedance 1104 3430 12 Selection of trigger mode Auto Trig The pulse generator is triggered automatically The pulse period is as entered under Pulse Period Ext Trig The pulse generator is externally triggered The pulse period is determined by an external signal at the PULSE input Ext Gated The pulse generator is triggered ifthe gate signal is active IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SOUR AUTO Selection of active edge of external trigger signal Pos The pulse generator is triggered on the positive edge of the external signal Neg The pulse generator is triggered on the negative edge of the external signal IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SLOP POS Definition of active level of gate signal LOW or HIGH IEC IEEE bus command TRIG PULS SOUR EXT_GATED Selection of 50
209. lected The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST POW POIN Answer 327 SOURce LIST SELect name of list The command selects the list indicated If there is no list of this name a new list is created The name may contain up to 7 letters If the list does not exist yet it is created The command triggers an event and thus has no RST value Example SOUR LIST SEL LIST1 1104 3430 12 6 26 E 1 SMR SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to control the generation of markers during the sweep The SMR has ten markers each for frequency and level sweeps which are distinguished by a numeric suffix after MARKer The settings for frequency sweep and level sweep marker are independent of each other Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce MARKer 1 2 3 10 FSWeep AMPLitude ON OFF AOFF no query FREQuency 1 GHz to Fmax Hz with Option SMR B11 above 10 MHz STATe ON OFF PSWeep AOFF no query POWer 130 dBm to 25 dBm dBm 20 dBm to 25dBm without Option SMR STATe ON OFF 25 SOURce MARKert1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FSWeep The commands for the markers with frequency sweep are under this node Keyword FSWeep can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulations SOURce MARKert1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FSWeep AMPLitude ON OFF The command specifies whether the marker influences the signal level ON The ou
210. lection window of the MemSeq menu opens automatically if one of the editor functions of the Edit List line Insert Fill Edit View Delete is selected The list indicated in the Select List line is displayed Menu selection MemSeq 11 000 000 0000 ol 20 0 dem MemsSeq Eqdit 0001 Fig 4 30 MemSeq menu selection window MSeq Index of list Free Indication of empty locations of list Len Length of current list 1104 3430 12 4 41 E 1 Utilities SMR Utilities The Utilities menu contains submenus for general functions not directly related to signal generation Menu selection Utilities 11 000000 0000 oul 20 0 dem Utilities System Ref Dsc Protect Diag Test Mod Key Setup Install Back 4 Fig 4 31 Utilities menu Display Menu Utilities Display offers the contrast settings of the display Setting range is O to 63 Menu selection Utilities Display 10 0000000000 cHz 200 dem Fig 4 32 Utilities Display menu System Menu selection Utilities System 10 000 000 0000 ch Utilities System ASZ3Z Security Language Back 4 Fig 4 33 Utilities System menu 1104 3430 12 4 42 E 1 SMR Utilities IEC IEEE Bus Address System GPIB Access to the remote control address is offered by the System GPIB Address submenu The setting range is 0 to 30 The address is factory set to 28 Menu selection Utilities System GPIB Address 11 000 0000000 cul 20 0 dem Utili
211. lete List Opens a window from which a list can be selected whose contents are to be deleted see section Delete List Edit List Selection of editing functions for list editing When this item is selected a pop up menu with the following editing functions opens see section Edit List Insert Insertion of elements into a list Fill Filling of a list with elements Edit View Editing of individual elements of a list Delete Deletion of elements of a list 1104 3430 12 3 7 E 1 List Editor SMR Select List gt Mark the desired list using the rotary knob see Fig 3 4 gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The selected list is included in the instrument setup The selection window is closed The selected list is displayed under Select List Selection Select List 11 000000 0000 ohz 20 0 dem ListSelect List IS 0000 Lisi 0000 Lisz O000 List 0000 List OOOO Lists 0000 Lists 0000 List 0000 Lists 0000 Lists 0000 Fig 3 4 Select List window LISTO The currently selected list in this case ListO is marked in the selection window 0100 The length of the list in this case 100 elements is indicated in the column right of the list designation Delete List gt Mark the desired list using the rotary knob see Fig 3 5 gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob The following query will appear Are you sure Press SELECT to confirm BACK to cancel gt Press the SELECT key or the rotary knob
212. ll as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1999 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 D 81671 M nchen Munich 2002 08 30 Central Quality Management FS QZ Becker 1104 0002 01 CE E 3 SMR General Overview of Manuals General Overview of Manuals Operating Manual for Microwave Signal Generator SMR This operating manual provides you with all the information necessary for putting into operation manual and remote control as well as repair of Microwave Signal Generator SMR and also contains specifications of the instrument and available options The following models are described in this manual SMR20 1 GHz to 20 GHz 10 MHz to 20 GHz with Option SMR B11 SMR27 1 GHz to 27 GHz 10 MHz to 27 GHz with Option SMR B11 SMR30 1 GHz to 30 GHz 10 MHz to 30 GHz with Option SMR B11 SMR40 1 GHz to 40 GHz 10 MHz to 40 GHz with Option SMR B11 The contents of the chapters are as follows Data sheet informs you about guaranteed specifications relating to functions and characteristics of the instrument and its options Chapier 1 contains all information about putting into operation unpacking connection to AC supply switching on and off functional testing and installation of the instrument preset settings and views of the front and rear panel showing the controls and connectors needed for operation Chapter 2 presents a brief introduct
213. menu cf Chapter 4 Sections Amplitude Modulation Frequency Modulation and LF Output 1104 3430 12 4 18 E 1 SMR Digital Modulations ASK and FSK Digital Modulations ASK and FSK The digital modulation types ASK and FSK are possible only with option SMR B5 Settings for ASK modulation can be made in the Digital Mod Ask menu Menu selection Digital Mod Ask 10 000 000 0000 ch Digital MOglAsk Off Depth 30 0 5 Ext Impedance 100 Kita Inverse F Fig 4 16 Digital Mod Ask menu preset setting option SMR B5 fitted Source Selection of modulation source for ASK amplitude shift keying IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM TYPE ASK SOUR EXT STAT ON Depth Input value of deviation for ASK IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM ASK DEPT 30PCT Ext Impedance Selection of input impedance for EXT IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM EXT IMP 100kOHM Polarity Selection of polarity of modulation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM ASK POL NOR 1104 3430 12 4 19 E 1 Digital Modulations ASK and FSK SMR Settings for FSK modulation can be made in the Digital Mod Fsk menu Menu selection Digital Mod Fsk 10 000 000 0000 ch Digital Mod F sk Ort 10 0000 kHz 100 Kse Inverse Fig 4 17 Digital Mod Fsk menu preset setting option SMR B5 fitted Source Selection of modulation source for FSK Frequency Shift Keying IEC IEEE bus command SOUR DM TYPE FSK SOUR EXT STAT ON
214. moumba ul 01042 Kiev Rohde amp Schwarz International GmbH Liaison Office Middle East Vertrieb P O Box 31156 Abu Dhabi Rohde amp Schwarz Bick Mobile Communication PO Bos 17466 JAFZ PPU 7G 07 Dubai Rohde amp Schwarz Emirates L L C ESNAAD Premisses at Mussafah P 0 Box 31156 Abu Dhabi Rohde amp Schwarz UK Ltd Ancells Business Park Fleet Hampshire GU51 2UZ Tel Tel 886 2 28 93 10 88 Fax 886 2 28 91 72 60 ine tu rstw rohde schwarz com Tel 255 22 276 00 37 Fax 255 22 276 02 93 sstl ud co tz Tel 66 2 200 07 29 Fax 66 2 267 00 79 Tel 66 2 69 41 47 05 Fax 66 2 69 41 476 salestm schmidtelectronics com Tel 66 2 880 93 47 Fax 66 2 880 93 47 Tel Fax Tel 216 71 77 33 88 Fax 216 71 77 05 53 teletek gnet tn Tel 90 216 385 19 17 Fax 90 216 385 19 18 nadir guerelman rsd rohde schwarz com Tel 38 044 268 60 55 Fax 38 044 268 83 64 rsbkiev public ua net Tel 971 2 6335 670 Fax 971 2 6335 671 Dario Barisoni rsd rohde schwarz com Tel 971 4 883 71 35 Fax 971 4 883 71 36 Tel 971 2 55 49 411 Fax 971 2 55 49 433 rsuaeam emirates net ae 44 1252 81 88 88 sales 44 1252 81 88 18 service Fax 44 1252 81 14 47 sales rsuk rohde schwarz com United Kingdom Uruguay USA Vietnam West Indies Rohde amp Schwarz UK Ltd 3000 Manchester Busi
215. n 0 to 32767 6 44 STATus OPERation ENABle 0 to 32767 6 45 STATus PRESet 6 45 l STATus QUEStionable EVENt 6 45 l STATus QUEStionable CONDition 6 45 l STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 to 32767 6 45 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 0 to 32767 6 45 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 to 32767 6 45 l STATus QUEue NEXT 6 45 l SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 to 30 6 47 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 6 47 38400 57600 115200 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS 718 6 47 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 112 6 47 l SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS ON IBFull RFR 6 47 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PACE XON NONE 6 47 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity ODD EVEN NONE 6 48 l SYSTem ERRor 6 48 l SYSTem MODE Fixed MSEQence not SCPI 6 48 l SYSTem MSEQuence CATalog not SCPI 6 48 l SYSTem MSEQuence DELete Sequence name not SCPI 6 48 l SYSTem MSEQuence DELete ALL not SCPI 6 48 l SYSTem MSEQuence DWELI 50 ms to 60 s 50 ms to 60 s not SCPI 6 49 SYSTem MSEQuence FREE not SCPI 6 49 l SYSTem MSEQuence MODE AUTO STEP not SCPI 6 49 SYSTem MSEQuence RCL 1 to 50 1 to 50 not SCPI 6 49 l SYSTem MSEQuence RCL POINts not SCPI 6 49 SYSTem MSEQuence SELect Sequence name not SCPI 6 49 l SYSTem PRESet 6 50 l SYSTem PROTect 1 2 3 STATe ON OFF Password not S
216. n in a single bit It can be queried by means of a parallel poll see section Parallel Poll or using the command IST The parallel poll enable PPE register determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE Unlike the SRE bit 6 is used in this case The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using the command PRE and read using the command PRE Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part of an SCPI register The event status register can be read using the command ESR The ESE is the associated ENABle part It can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 5 3 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command oPc when all previous commands have been executed 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is errored and hence cannot be executed 3 Device Dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300
217. n overview of the commands and their hierarchical arrangement see indentations Parameter In the parameter column the requested parameters are indicated together with their specified range Unit The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters Remark In the remark column an indication is made on whether the command does not have a query form whether the command has only one query form whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the instrument Indentations The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the table by means of indentations to the right The lower the level is the farther the indentation to the right is Please observe that the complete notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well Example SOURce FM MODE is represented in the table as follows SOURce first level FM second level MODE third level In the individual description the complete notation of the command is given An example for each command and if it exists the default value RST is written out at the end of the individual description 1104 3430 12 6 1 E 1 Description of Commandes SMR Upper lower case notation Special characters 1104 3430 12 Upper lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case lett
218. n the battery is discharged the data stored will be lost Exchanging the battery is described in the Service Manual Instrument 1104 3430 12 1 2 E 1 SMR Putting into Operation Preset Setting A defined setting status is achieved by pressing the PRESET key Preset Status RF frequency 10 GHz RF level 30 dBm 20 dBm without option SMR B15 SMR B17 Attenuator Reference frequency internal adjustment off Offsets 0 Modulations switched off Transient free level setting switched off level attenuator mode Auto Internal level control level Alc On User correction level Ucor Off LF output switched off Sweep switched off List mode switched off Memory sequence switched off Suppression of indications system security unaltered Protection of calibration data protection lock unaltered Settings stored unaltered Data lists etc stored unaltered IEC bus address unaltered All parameters and circuit states even those of operating modes which are not activated are preset by means of Preset The presettings going beyond the above list can be seen from the menu representations as of Chapter 4 which each indicate the Preset setting status Functional Test On switching on the instrument and permanently during operation the SMR carries out a self test The ROM contents as well as the battery of the non volatile RAM are checked The most important instrument functions are automatically monitored during operation If an error is detec
219. nal Generator SMR provides information on the checking of rated characteristics manual and electronic adjustment repair fault diagnosis module replacement and the fitting of options Moreover it includes documentation such as spare parts list basic circuit diagram block diagram etc 1104 3430 12 E E 1 SMR Putting into Operation 1 Putting into Operation This chapter contains all information about putting into operation unpacking connection to AC supply switching on and off functional testing and installation of the instrument preset settings and views of the front and rear panel showing the controls and connectors needed for operation General Instructions Before putting the SMR into operation please make sure that e the covers of the casing are put on and screwed e the ventilation openings are free e no signal voltage levels exceeding the permissible limits are applied at the inputs e the outputs of the instrument are not overloaded or connected incorrectly If these points are not observed the instrument might be damaged Unpacking the Instrument lt a P gt Take the instrument out of the shipping box and check whether the items listed in the packing list and in the lists of accessories are all included gt Remove the two protective caps from the front and rear of the SMR and carefully check the instrument for damage remove protective cabs Shoul
220. nds for the IF input of the SMR Command Parameter Default Remark Unit INPut JE INPut IF STATe OFF ON The command switches on or off the IF input Example INP IF STAT ON RST value is OFF MEMory System This system contains the commands for the memory management of the SMR Command Parameter Default Remark Unit MEMory NSTates Query only MEMory NSTates The command returns the number of SAV RCL memories available The SMR has 50 SAV RCL memories in total Example MEM NST Response 50 1104 3430 12 6 10 E 1 SMR OUTput OUTPut System This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the RF and LF output sockets and the auxiliary sockets BLANK Z AXIS and V GHz The following numbers are assigned to these outputs OUTPut1 RF output BLANK output and Z AXIS output OUTPut2 LF output OUTPut3 V GHz output Command Parameter Default Remark Unit OUTPut1 2 3 AMODe AUTO FIXed ATTenuation Oto 110 dB IMPedance Query only POLarity PULSe NORMal INVerted SCALe 0 5 1 SOURce OFF PULSegen VIDeo STATe PON OFF UNCHanged VOLTage 0Vto4V Y OUTPut1 AMODe AUTO FIXed The command switches over the operating mode of the attenuator Attenuator MODe at the RF output outputt AUTO The attenuator is switched whenever possible FIXed The attenuator is switched when certain fixed levels are exceeded not reached Example
221. ne rnnnenennnen 4 27 C CalibratiOn c 22 unis feiss Gh ii oe 4 48 TEE 6 50 Eer GE 4 47 6 50 Call instrument settings 00 ecce eet eeteteteteneeteneeteetenteeteneenee 3 14 MENU a ein 3 4 Center frequency REESWEED ann ea e ea naia a 4 30 6 21 Character data REESEN 5 9 Cleaning DUI aaa a aii 8 1 1104 3430 12 10 1 Clear all stored dai 4 45 Command addressed commande oococccococcconocccononcconancconnnnanananc no 5 27 common commanaS 5 5 5 6 6 3 device specific commande 5 5 5 6 hierarchical arangement 6 1 long form 9 7 parameters 5 10 Palio E 5 6 PLOCOS EE 5 13 QU a aaa 5 5 recognition SEQUENCE 7 Setting Commande 5 5 Oe EE EE 5 A ener cis cogdongeaniencecabie structure of command lines Synchronization ueesesesneeesennnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 15 7 3 Syntax eleMentS AAA 5 12 universal commanas af Command ErrORDIE iii arena Command lines SUCIO A A A E la 5 9 Common Commande iocccccccoccccononcnonancnnnanancnonan cnc nnnn na nnnnn cnn 6 3 CONDition Gart 5 17 Control signal pulse modulation 4 15 Controller mode tocino cada cala 7 6 Coupling EXTA 2 AM oc icon 4 13 6 14 EXT1 2 FM 4 14 6 19 Crosshatch symbol 8 5 11 5 12 Cursor ee 3 1 MENU CUSO un naar eis 3 1 D Data format RS 232 C ian aia ai i ai set IEC IEEE bus z Data bit RS 232 C Decimal Point siniraan e
222. ness Park Aviator Way Manchester M22 5TG Aeromarine S A Cerro Largo 1497 11200 Montevideo Rohde amp Schwarz Inc Eastern Regional Office US Headquarters 8661A Robert Fulton Drive Columbia MD 21046 2265 Rohde amp Schwarz Inc Central Regional Office Systems amp EMI Products 8080 Tristar Drive Suite 120 Irving TX 75063 Rohde amp Schwarz Inc R amp D and Application Support 8905 SW Nimbus Ave Suite 240 Beaverton OR 97008 Rohde amp Schwarz Inc Western Regional Office 7700 Irvine Center Drive Suite 100 Irvine CA 92618 Rohde amp Schwarz Inc Service amp Calibration Center 8661A Robert Fulton Drive Columbia MD 21046 2265 Rohde amp Schwarz Representative Office Vietnam Unit 807 8 F Schmidt Tower 239 Xuan Thuy Road Cau Giay District Hanoi siehe see Mexico Tel 44 870 735 16 42 Fax 44 1252 81 14 77 sales rsuk rohde schwarz com Tel 598 2 400 39 62 Fax 598 2 401 85 97 cs aeromarine com uy Tel 1 410 910 78 00 Fax 1 410 910 78 01 info rsa rohde schwarz com D Tel 1 469 713 53 00 Fax 1 469 713 53 01 info rsa rohde schwarz com Tel 1 503 403 47 00 Fax 1 503 403 47 01 info rsa rohde schwarz com Tel 1 949 885 70 00 Fax 1 949 885 70 01 info rsa rohde schwarz com Tel 1 410 910 50 02 Fax 1 410 910 79 31 service rsa rsa rohde schwarz com Tel 84 4 834 20 46 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ
223. nnnnennnnnnnsnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnennnnnnnenn 6 38 SOURce2 FUNCtion Subsystem ccc eeeeee cee e eect eeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeaeee nn nn eeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeeeeees 6 40 SOURce2 MARKer Subsystem 440444404nnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nen 6 41 SOURce2 SWEep Subsystem nenn 6 42 STATUS SAM id llo 6 44 SAS TOM SAMA ii A a dida 6 46 n Ann E E A scusecnduet eecuzavususeuatees 6 51 TRIG GOP SY Ste E 6 52 RR lu EE 6 56 7 Remote Control Programming Examples uuuuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 7 1 Including IEC Bus Library for QuickBasic unsussssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnn 7 1 Initialization and Default Status unneesnsnnsnnsnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnn nme 7 1 Initiate Controller ii ee IA al hae EE A 7 1 Initiate lnstrument n ee 7 1 Transmission of Instrument Setting COMMAMNAS suu4420044000n0n00nnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnnannnnn 7 2 Switchover to Manual Control uuuuesusnssansnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnn nenn 7 2 Reading out Instrument Settings uuuuseausnnannnnnannnnnnannnnnnnnnannunnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnannnnnannnn anna 7 2 List Management EE 7 3 Command syne Hrona ON a e ae aeea aar aae ae ere rea r Ee e A e e Ser Eaa r Ee anp SaR raoe Eara Rodaan oE Ea inaa 7 3
224. nnnnnnnn nen 5 29 Common Commands iii A is 6 3 Device Response to OPT 6 4 SMR Figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 1104 3430 12 1 1 12 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 Contents A ege eege ed ege ee ege See dees 1 4 A a Stangen ahnen 1 9 Display for AM SGtINO ica tl 2 3 Display f r pattern setling cate tratante linia 25 Design of the display eicere ireid kisiki Eretini EEA an 3 1 Modulation AM Menu ee nn 3 2 LIST MOM iia 3 7 Select LIST WING OWss E 3 8 Delete List ils UE 3 8 Edit function TTT 3 10 EINEN UNC Eee 3 11 Edit SAMA BU Tee eo ei 3 12 Delete editing function ooococinnniconinnnoconncccccnn carr NEEN 3 13 Frequency menu preset Setting 4 1 Typical setups with frequency offset and frequency multiplier coo 4 2 Level menu with option SMR B15 attenuator 20 GHz 4 3 Typical setup with level ofteet A 4 5 Basic principle of level control Of MP 4 6 Example of external level control with power meter 4 6 Level Alc menu preset Setting 4 7 Level U ermment goe ek en 4 8 Weor Levelimenu 4 2 3 citant A
225. nual control press the LOCAL key on the front panel 1104 3430 12 5 2 E 1 SMR Switchover to Remote Control Switchover to Remote Control On power up the instrument is always in the manual control mode LOCAL state and can be operated via the front panel The instrument is switched to remote control REMOTE state as follows IEC IEEE bus when it receives an addressed command from the controller RS 232 C interface when it receives a carriage return lt CR gt 0Dh or a line feed lt LF gt 0Ah from the controller During remote control operation via the front panel is disabled The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via the IEC IEEE bus Switching from manual to remote control and vice versa does not affect the instrument settings Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus Setting the Device Address The IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument is factory set to 28 It can be changed manually in the Utilities System GPIB Address menu or via the IEC IEEE bus Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible Manually gt Call Utilities System GPIB Address menu gt Enter desired address gt Terminate input using the 1x ENTER key Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Transfer old address to controller CALL IBWRT generator SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 20 Set instrument to new address CALL IBP
226. o encima de materiales blandos como por ejemplo sof s o alfombras o dentro de una caja cerrada si esta no est suficientemente ventilada No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que produzcan calor como por ejemplo radiadores o calentadores La temperatura ambiental no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la hoja de datos p gina 4 27 28 29 30 Informaciones de seguridad Baterias y acumuladores no deben de ser expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego Guardar baterias y acumuladores fuera del alcance de los ni os Si las bater as o los acumuladores no son cambiados con la debida atenci n existir peligro de explosi n atenci n celulas de Litio Cambiar las bater as o los acumuladores solamente por los del tipo R amp S correspondiente ver lista de piezas de recambio Bater as y acumuladores son deshechos problem ticos Por favor tirenlos en los recipientes especiales para este f n Por favor tengan en cuenta las prescripciones nacionales de cada pa s referente al tratamiento de deshechos Nunca sometan las bater as o acumuladores a un corto circuito Tengan en consideraci n de que en caso de un incendio pueden escaparse gases t xicos del producto que pueden causar da os a la salud Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de un incendio pueden desprenderse del producto agentes venenosos gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud No sit e el producto encima de
227. ocess the contents of the register parts as positive integer ts tahsl CONDition part ach H mn An ZU Wi WW sshahsl z EVENt part 8 b h b Ww V V to higher order register LEERSE REA AAA gt AAMA AAAA Sum bit amp logical ANC behaale ENABle part 2210 logical OR of all bits Fig 5 3 Status register model 1104 3430 12 5 16 E 1 SMR Status Reporting System CONDition part PTRansition part NTRansition part EVENt part ENABIe part Sum bit The CONDition part is directly written to by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflects the current instrument status This register part can be read only but not written to or cleared Reading does not affect it contents The Positive Transition part acts as an edge detector If a bit of the CONDition part changes from 0 to 1 the status of the associated PTR bit determines whether the EVEN bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written to and read Reading does not affect its contents The Negative Transition part likewise acts as an edge detector If a bit of the CONDition part changes from 1 to 0 the status of the associated NTR bit determines whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part c
228. offset and multiplier causes a change of the frequency value displayed in the header line the value taking into account the offset is displayed The value of the RF output frequency is displayed under Frequency in the Frequency menu The entered offset remains active also for frequency sweeps Input value Offset L O gt Mixer P RF output frequency Input value Frequency Frequency Frequency menu Header line display Input value Multiplier Frequency gt multiplier gt RF output frequency Input value Frequency Frequency Frequency menu Header line display Fig 4 2 Typical setups with frequency offset and frequency multiplier 1104 3430 12 4 2 E 1 SMR RF Level RF Level The RF level can be set directly using the LEVEL key or via the Level Level menu In the Level Level menu the set RF output level is entered and indicated under Amplitude In level settings made with the LEVEL key the offset of a subsequent attenuator amplifier is taken into account see section Level Offset This makes it possible to enter the desired level at the output of subsequent units The offset can also be entered in the Level Level menu under Offset dBm dBuV mV and uV can be used as level units The four unit keys are labelled with the respective units To change to another level unit simply press the corresponding unit key Note The note Unleveled appears in the status line if the displayed level is no
229. om Tel 86 21 63 75 00 18 Fax 86 21 63 75 91 70 May Zhu rsbp rohde schwarz com Tel 86 20 87 55 47 58 Fax 86 20 87 55 47 59 Winnie Lin rsbp rohde schwarz com Adressen Addresses China Costa Rica Croatia Cuba Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Egypt El Salvador Estonia Finland France Germany Rohde amp Schwarz China Ltd Representative Office Chengdu Unit G 28 F First City Plaza 308 Shuncheng Avenue Chengdu 610017 Rohde amp Schwarz China Ltd Representative Office Xian Room 603 Jin Xin International o 99 Heping Road Xian 710001 Rohde amp Schwarz China Ltd Representative Office Shenzhen 0 88 Fuhua Yilu Futian Distric Shenzhen 518026 siehe see Mexico siehe see Slovenia siehe see Mexico Hinis Telecast Ltd Agiou Thoma 18 iti Larnaca 7550 Rohde amp Schwarz Praha s r o Hadovka Office Park Evropsk 2590 33c 16000 Praha 6 Rohde amp Schwarz Danmark A S Ejby Industrivej 40 2600 Glostrup U A S Universal Advanced Systems 31 Manshiet El Bakry Street Heliopolis 11341 Cairo siehe see Mexico Rohde amp Schwarz Danmark A S Estonian Branch Office arva mnt 13 10151 Tallinn Rohde amp Schwarz Finland Oy aivaltie 5 01610 Vantaa Rohde amp Schwarz France mmeuble Le Newton 9 11 rue Jeanne Braconnier 92366 Meudon La For t C dex iederlassung Subsidiary Rennes 37 Rue du Bignon Batiment A 35510 Cesson S v
230. om the addition of the two signals If the maximum value of deviation or modulation depth is exceeded overmodulation occurs Mutual Switch Off of Modulation Types Due to the multiple use of function modules in the instrument some modulation types cannot be activated simultaneousiy see Table 4 3 With manual control incompatible modulation types deactivate one another and a short time warning message is output in the status line Note IEC IEEE bus control according to SCPI does not allow the selection of incompatible modulation types With remote control an error message is output when an attempt is made to activate incompatible types of modulation see Chapter 9 1104 3430 12 4 11 E 1 Modulation General SMR Table 4 3 Modulation types which cannot be active simultaneously AM FM ASK and FSK only with option SMR B5 FM1 FM1 FM1 FM2 FM2 FM2 FM2 EXT1 EXT2 FSK INT2 EXT1 EXT2 FSK AM INT1 rn AM INT2 Wei AM EXT1 x ASK x mE Fm1 INT1 O FM1 EXT1 x FM1 EXT2 D FM1 FSK a FM2 INT2 Io FM2 EXT1 Kal FM2 EXT2 o FM2 FSK Heal X Mutual switch off with manual control o Switch off by 1 out of n selection MOD ON OFF Key The various types of modulation can be switched on and off directly using the MOD ON OFF key or via the Modulation menu If switch on is made using the MOD ON OFF key the modulation sources which are set in the modulation menus are
231. on FM menu preset setting FM Deviation Input value for deviation IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM 10kHz FM Source Switching on off FM and selection of modulation source IEC IEEE bus commands SOUR FM SOUR INT STAT ON Ext1 Coupling Selection of AC or DC coupling for external input EXT1 IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM EXT1 COUP AC Ext2 Coupling Selection of AC or DC coupling for external input EXT2 IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM EXT2 COUP AC Ext1 Impedance Selection of input impedance for external input EXT 1 IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM EXT1 IMP 100kOhm Ext2 Impedance Selection of input impedance for external input EXT2 IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM EXT2 IMP 100kOhm Lfgen Freq Selection of frequency of LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR FM INT FREOQ 1kHz Lfgen Shape Selection of waveform of LF generator IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FUNC SIN 1104 3430 12 4 14 E 1 SMR Analog Modulation Pulse Modulation The pulse modulator can be controlled from an external source or by an internal pulse generator option SMR B14 With external control the external source feeds the pulse modulator directly The envelope of the RF is identical to the control signal With control by the internal pulse generator the pulse shape of the pulse generator determines the envelope of the RF The pulse delay pulse width and pulse period can be set The polarity of pulse modulation is selectable With Pulse Polarity Normal the RF level
232. onding to value set under Frequency Adjustment The OCXO Reference Oscillator option SMR B1 is switched off Only the standard reference oscillator is on IEC IEEE bus command ROSC ADJ STAT ON Frequency Adjustment Input value in the range 2048 to 2047 for setting the internal reference frequency Pull in range 4x10 6 IEC IEEE bus command ROSC ADJ VAL 2047 1104 3430 12 4 46 E 1 SMR Utilities Passwords for Accessing Protected Functions Protect Calibration and service functions are password protected To access these functions passwords 6 digit numbers have to be entered and confirmed with the ENTER key These functions are automatically locked out on power up of the instrument Password 1 deactivates the lock for the calibration of Level Mainboard Lfgen and Loopgain Password 2 deactivates the lock for the calibration of RefOsc Password 3 enables input of the serial number and the count for POWER ON operating hours and attenuator operating cycles Access to protected functions is possible in the Utilities Protect menu Menu selection Utilities Protect 10 000 0000000 ch E Get See zZ Lock Level 3 Fig 4 38 Utilities Protect menu preset setting Lock Level x Activation deactivation of lock On The lock is active IEC IEEE bus command SYST PROT1 ON Off The entry of the password is enabled automatically The entry of the password must be confirmed with ENTER After the password has b
233. operation see STARt as well As to the specified range cf FREQ CENT Example SOUR FREQ STOP 15GHz RST value is 20 GHz SOURce FREQuency STEP The command to enter the step width for the frequency setting if frequency values UP or DOWN are used is under this node This command is coupled to the Knob Step command in manual control Only linear step widths can be set SOURce FREQuency STEP INCRement 0 to 10 GHz The command sets the step width for the frequency setting Example SOUR FREQ STEP INCR 1MHz RST value is 1 MHz 1104 3430 12 6 23 E 1 SOURce LIST SMR SOURce LIST Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the List operating mode of the RF generator Processing the lists is controlled by the TRIG LIST subsystem The List mode is activated by command SOUR FREQ MODE LIST Each list consists of a FREQ POW and DWEL part The list parts must all be of the same length except for parts of length 1 This is interpreted as if the part had the same length as the other parts and all values were equal to the first value Note SCPI designates the individual lists as segments Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce LIST CATalog query only DELete name of list ALL DWELI imsto1s s POINts query only FREE FREQuency 1 GHz to Fmax 1 GHZ to Fmax block data Hz with SMR B11 above 10 MHz POINts query only MODE AUTO STEP POWer 130 to 25
234. or SPAC LIN also changes according to the formula stated under POINts A change of SPAN does not result in a change of STEP LIN Keyword LIN can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulations see example Example SOUR SWE STEP 1MHz RST value is 1 MHz SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 100 PCT The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated according to new frequency previous frequency STEP LOG x previous frequency if STARt lt STOP STEP LOG indicates the fraction of the previous frequency by which this is increased for the next sweep step Usually ST explicitly If or EP LOG is indicated in percent with the suffix PCT having to be used EP LOG is changed the value of POINts valid for sPAC LOG also changes according to the formula stated under POINts A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STE P LOG Example SOUR SWE STEP LOG 10PCT RST value is 1 PCT SOURce SWEep POWer The commands to set the power sweeps are under this node SOURce SWEep POWer DWELI 10 msto5s The command sets the dwell time per level step Example SOUR SWE POW DWEL 12ms RST value is 15 ms 1104 3430 12 6 36 E 1 SMR SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the sweep mode AUTO Each trigger trig
235. os como por ejemplo las instalaciones de radiaci n HF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada En vista a la protecci n de la vida en desarrollo deber an ser protegidas personas embarazadas debidamente Tambi n las personas con un bypass pueden correr 1171 0000 42 02 00 10 11 peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario est comprometido a valorar y se alar areas de trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de exposici n a radiaciones aumentadas de riesgo aumentado para evitar riesgos La utilizaci n de los productos requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n en el manejo Debe de ponerse por seguro de que las personas que manejen los productos est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios referente a sus aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo de los productos Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber tener por seguro de que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a la del la red de distribuci n Si es necesario cambiar la preselecci n de la tensi n tambi n se deber n en caso dabo cambiar los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto Productos de la clase de seguridad con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual de producto
236. possible time Long The blank duration is set for the PEN LIFT control of an XY recorder approx 500 ms IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 SWE BTIM NORM Yiahlz Selection of the slope of the signal at the V GHz output IEC IEEE bus command OUTP3 SCAL 0 5 1104 3430 12 4 54 E 1 SMR Utilities Setup Setup Settings for Rf Blanking and Alc Slope can be made in the Utilities Setup menu If one of these parameters is selected a pop up menu displays the available settings Menu selection Utilities Setup 10 000 000 0000 ch ties Setup Ff Blanking Fig 4 46 Utilities Setup menu Rf Blanking Selection of the RF blanking method for sweeps with step widths less than 10 MHz Auto RF blanking only when the step synthesizer switches to the next step provides a clean RF spectrum Off No RF blanking On RF blanking after each step Alc Slope Selection of RF power slew rate Fast Fast nominal setting Medium Medium slew rate Slow Low slew rate 1104 3430 12 4 55 E 1 Help System Status SMR Help System The SMR offers two help systems For one there is context sensitive help which is called with the HELP key and provides information on the current menu For another there is the HELP menu from which help texts can be selected from an alphabetical subject index HELP Key The HELP key can be pressed at any time The current setting menu will then be blanked and the context sensitive text inserted Th
237. put BLANK asian sis a ee 4 27 4 35 4 54 Pr act ata ata 1 9 4 21 6 12 MARKER oia 4 27 4 35 6 41 PULSE VIDEO eenen 1 11 4 23 6 12 REE aci tamal 1 9 4 46 Osorio 1 7 6 11 6 21 Ch dE 1 11 VE E 1 11 4 54 6 12 EE 1 11 4 27 ZAX O nennen 4 27 Output buffer IEC IEEE bus 5 15 Output eye 4 3 6 29 Output unit IEC IEEE bus 5 15 Overlapping execution usenserssensenennnnsennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnenen 5 14 Overmodul tion EE 4 11 Overview incompatible modulation tes 4 11 modulation SOUICES oooooincccocaconiconcconccanacnonncanccanccnnnos 4 10 Status registers ieai nie iden ean e 5 18 Syntax elements c uuusnuuernenrenesnenennnnnnnnnnnennnnnen nenn 5 12 RACK 22 ea Eisen 8 1 Parallel poll Parallel poll enable register DPE E 20 Parameter EE A A a aA 3 3 text Parameler ici ii O li 5 10 Parameters commande 5 10 Parity RS 232 C 4 44 6 47 Parity bit DES 222 5 29 EE EE 4 47 6 50 Path commande 5 6 Period pulse 4 15 4 23 Physical QUANTITIOS AA 5 9 Polarity ASK en ee ee Ee 4 19 6 18 EE 4 20 6 18 pulse cocococccccccncnicannno 4 15 4 23 pulse modulation nen 6 32 Power Slew tale nes nee 4 55 Power control O sisese deet dee eters inact 6 29 ee 1 2 Power On bit 5 20 Power Supply oococccocccccnoos ER al Power supply connector salg Power SWE8OP cooooccccnocccccnacccnanancncnno 6 36 PPE parallel poll ena
238. put value of start frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FREQ STAR 0kHz Stop Freq Input value of stop frequency IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FREQ STOP 100kHz Current Freq Display of current frequency value In Step mode input value of frequency Spacing Selection of linear or logarithmic sweep IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 SWE SPAC LIN Step Lin Input value of step size IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 SWE STEP LIN 1kHz Dwell Input value of dwell time per step IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 SWE DWEL 15ms Mode Selection of sweep mode see Operating Modes IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 FREQ MODE SWE SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO TRIG2 SOUR SING 1104 3430 12 4 32 E 1 SMR Reset Sweep Exec Single Sweep Marker 1 3 Freq Marker 1 3 State 1104 3430 12 Sweep Sets the start frequency IEC IEEE bus command ABOR Starts a single sweep This function is displayed and is effective only if Single Mode is selected IEC IEEE bus command TRIG Input value of frequency for the selected marker IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 MARK1 FREQ 100kHz Switching on off selected marker IEC IEEE bus command SOUR2 MARK1 OFF 4 33 E 1 List Mode SMR List Mode In the list mode a sequence of predefined frequency and level points is executed similar as in the sweep mode Differently from the sweep mode a list of freely selectable pairs of values frequency and level can be generated The available
239. r operation Switch off gt Release switch On Off switch at the front of the instrument Initial Status Upon switching on the instrument automatically assumes the status which was set when it was switched off If the instrument need not to be operated from the initial status any further a defined default status should be established by pressing the PRESET key prior to further settings Frequency accuracy after switching on when the oven controlled reference oscillator is fitted option SMR B1 The reference oscillator needs some minutes of warm up time to reach its nominal frequency During this period of time the output frequency does not yet reach its final value either In the status line in the header field of the display the message OVEN COLD is displayed for this time RAM With Battery Back Up The SMR has a static read write memory CMOS RAM with battery back up in which 50 different complete settings of the instrument can be stored cf Chapter 3 section Storing and Calling of Instrument Settings In addition all data and or lists the user enters himself such as for list mode memory sequence and user correction of the level are stored in the RAM Further all data of the calibrations running within the instrument in the SMR are stored in the RAM cf Chapter 4 section Calibration and Service Manual Instrument A lithium battery with a service life of approx 5 years serves to supply the RAM with power Whe
240. r or WARNING if overrange settings have been made The ERROR page offers access to long term messages if the ERROR key is pressed 10 000 000 0000 caz 20 0 dem Test 1234567890 1Test 1234567890 ZTest 1234567590 Fig 9 1 ERROR page Notes An error message ERROR does not necessarily point to a defect instrument There are various operating states which can cause an ERROR message e g if the instrument is set to external reference but no external reference is connected Error 313 indicates the loss of calibration data and is also applicable in case of a cold start key PRESET is pressed during switch on The calibration values can be restored with internal calibration routines These routines are accessible via menu Utilities Calib see section on calibration 1104 3430 12 9 1 E 1 Error Messages SMR List of Error Messages The following list contains all SCPI and device specific error messages for errors occurring in the instrument The meaning of negative error codes is defined in SCPI positive error codes mark device dependent errors The lefthand column of the table below contains the error code In the righthand column the error text entered into the error event queue and shown on the display is in bold type Below the error text there is an explanation of the error SCPI Specific Error Messages No error Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error No error Th
241. rds ie they can be entered using a short or a long form Like any other parameter they must be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is returned Example Setting command OUTPut FILTer TYPE EXTernal Query OUTPut FILTer TYPE Response EXT 5 10 E 1 SMR Structure and Syntax of Device Messages Strings Block data 1104 3430 12 Strings must always be entered in inverted commas or Example SYSTem LANGuage SCPI or SYSTem LANGuage SCPI Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command with a block data parameter has the following structure Example HEADer HEADer 45168xxxxxxxx The data block is preceded by the ASCII character The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the four following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes This is followed by the data bytes During the transmission of the data bytes all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted Data elements comprising more than one byte are transmitted with the byte being the first which was specified by the SCPI command FORMat BORDer The format of the binary data within a block depends on the IEC IEEE bus command The commands SOURce LIST DWELL SOURce LIST FREQuency S
242. reacciones al rgicas como por ejemplo urticaria estornudos frecuentes irritaci n de la conjuntiva o dificultades al respirar se deber consultar inmediatamente a un m dico para averigurar los motivos de estas reacciones Si productos elementos de construcci n son tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de forma mec nica o t rmica pueden generarse elementos peligrosos polvos de sustancia de metales pesados como por ejemplo plomo berilio n quel La partici n elemental del producto como por ejemplo sucede en el tratamiento de materias residuales debe de ser efectuada solamente por personal especializado para estos tratamientos La partici n elemental efectuada inadecuadamente puede generar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes al tratamiento de materias residuales En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de peligro o combustibles en la aplicaci n del producto que debieran de ser transferidos a un tratamiento de materias residuales como por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben ser repuestos en periodos definidos o aceites para motores deberan ser tenidas en cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o combustibles y las regulaciones regionales para el tratamiento de materias residuales Cuiden tambi n de tener en cuenta en caso dado las prescripciones de seguridad especiales en la descripci n del producto Ciertos product
243. rkers off This command is an event and thus has no RST value and no query form Example SOUR MARK PSW AOFF SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PSWeep POWe 130 dBm to 25 dBm w o SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the level indicated In this command the OFFSet value of subsystem POWer menu Level is considered in correspondence with input value Marker in the Sweep Level menu Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOUR POW OFFS 0 RST value for MARK1 1 dBm MARk2 2 dBm Example SOUR MARK1 PSW POW 2dBm MARK3 3 dBm SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PSWeep SATe ON OFF The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer on or off Example SOUR MARK1 PSW STAT ON RST value is OFF 1104 3430 12 6 28 E 1 SMR SOURce POWer SOURce POWer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the output level the level control and the level correction of the RF signal Other units can be used instead of dBm e by indication directly after the numeric value example POW 0 5v Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce POWer ALC REFerence 0 3 V V SEARch Query only SOURce INTernal DIODe PMETer PMETer RS_NRVS HP436A STATe ON OFF LEVel MMediate AMPLitude 130 dBm to 25 dBm dBm OFFSet 100 to 100 dB dB LIMit l AMPLitude 130 dBm to 25 dBm dBm a Bd
244. routines InitController and InitDevice are used to this effect Initiate Controller REM Initiate Instrument REM InitController jecaddress 28 IEC bus address of the instrument CALL IBFIND DEV1 generators Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator iecaddress Inform controller on instrument address CALL IBTMO generator 11 Response time to 1 sec REM KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Initiate Instrument The IEC bus status registers and instrument settings of the SMR are brought into the default status REM Initiate Instrument REM InitDevice CALL IBWRT generators CLS Reset status register CALL IBWRT generator RST Reset instrument CALL IBWRT generator OUTPUT ON Switch on RF output REM gk EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE HH HH HH HH HH HH OK OK OK OK OK OK RO RR RR HH HH HH HH HH HK U 1104 3430 12 7 1 E 1 Programming Examples SMR Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands Output frequency output level and AM modulation are set in this example The settings correspond to the sample setting for first users in manual control By analogy to the step width setting of the rotary knob the step width is additionally set for the alteration of the RF frequency in the case of UP and DOWN REM Instrument setting commands CALL IBW
245. rrent setting is indicated at the right margin of the display gt Press BACK key or mark selection BACK using rotary knob and then press rotary knob The menu cursor wraps back to the next higher menu level Quick Selection of Menu QUICK SELECT The keys of the QUICK SELECT control field are used to call selected menus quickly by one keystroke Store menus Call menus 1104 3430 12 gt Establish the desired operating status of the current menu gt Press ASSIGN key gt Press MENU1 or MENU2 key The current menu is stored as menu or menu2 That is to say 2 menus can be stored in total gt Press MENU1 or MENU2 key Menu or menu2 stored is displayed Exactly the operating status which was current at the point of time of storing is reconstructed 3 4 E 1 SMR Basic Operating Steps Use of FREQ and LEVEL Keys RF frequency and RF level can be set without menu operation as well using direct keys FREQ and LEVEL FREQ LEVEL keys gt Press FREQ or LEVEL key The frequency or the level indication in the header field of the display is marked The current menu at the display is maintained gt Alter the value via a value input or the rotary knob gt Press BACK key or rotary knob The menu cursor wraps to the position marked last in the menu Use of RF ON OFF and MOD ON OFF RF signal and modulation can be switched on off without menu operation as well using keys RF ON OFF
246. rs Default Remark Unit SOURce PULM EXTernal IMPedance 50 Ohm to 10 kOhm Ohm Option SMR B14 POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce INTernal EXTernal Option SMR B14 STATe ON OFF SOURce PULM EXTernal The commands to control the input socket for the external pulse generator are under this node SOURce PULM EXTernal IMPedance 50 Ohm to 10 kOhm The command sets the impedance of the input socket for the external pulse generator The pulse generator has an own input socket hence this setting is independent of the corresponding settings under FM Example SOUR PULM EXT IMP 10E3 RST value is 10 kOhm SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerted The command specifies the polarity between modulating and modulated signal NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the interpulse period INVerted The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse Example SOUR PULM POL INV RST value is NORM SOURce PULM SOURce EXTernal INTernal The command selects the source of the modulating signal INTernal Internal pulse generator Option SMR B14 EXTernal Signal fed externally Example SOUR PULM SOUR INT RST value is INT SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off the pulse modulation Example SOUR PULM STAT ON RST value is OFF 1104 3430 12 6 32 E 1 SMR SOURce PULSe SOURce PULSe Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands to set the pulse generator Option SMR B14 The pulse generation is trigg
247. s at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers For this section it is assumed that the user has basic knowledge of IEC IEEE bus programming and operation of the controller A description of the interface commands will be found in the relevant manuals The requirements of the SCPI standard regarding command syntax error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment of the status registers The tables are complemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers A description of commands is given in chapter 6 Programming examples for the main functions will be found in chapter 7 Brief Instructions The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the instrument and setting of its basic functions IEC IEEE Bus It is assumed that the IEC IEEE bus address which is factory set to 28 has not been changed 1 Connect the instrument and the controller using the IEC IEEE bus cable 2 Write and start the following program on the controller CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Transfer instrument address to controller CALL IBWRT generator RST CLS Reset instrument CALL IBWRT generator FREQ 5GHz Set frequency to 5 GHz CALL IBWRT gener
248. s continued If on receipt of a terminator the input buffer is not full the input unit can receive the next command during command recognition and execution Receipt of a DCL command clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition 1104 3430 12 5 13 E 1 Instrument Model and Command Processing SMR Command Recognition The command recognition analyzes the data from the input unit in the order the data are received Only DCL commands are serviced with priority whereas GET commands Group Execute Trigger for example are processed only after the previously received commands Each recognized command is immediately transferred to the data set but without being executed there at once Syntactic errors in commands are detected here and transferred to the status reporting system The rest of a command line following a syntax error is further analyzed and processed as far as possible If the command recognition recognizes a terminator or a DCL command it requests the data set to set the commands now also in the instrument hardware After this it is immediately ready to continue processing commands This means that new commands can be processed while the hardware is being set overlapping execution Data Set and Instrument Hardware The term instrument hardware is used here to designate the part of the instrument which actually performs the instrument functions signal generation measurement etc The
249. s not defined for the instrument Example xyz is undefined for every instrument 114 Header suffix out of range The header contains an illegal numerical suffix Example SOURce3 does not exist in the instrument 123 Exponent too large The absolute value of the exponent is larger than 32000 124 Too many digits The number contains too many digits 128 Numeric data not allowed The command contains a number which is not allowed at this position Example The command SOURce FREQuency MODE requires the entry of a text parameter 131 Invalid suffix The suffix is invalid for this instrument Example nHz is not defined 134 Suffix too long The suffix contains more than 12 characters 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command Example The command RCL does not allow for a suffix to be entered 141 Invalid character data The text parameter either contains an invalid character or it is invalid for this command Example spelling mistake in parameter entry SOURce FREQuency MODE FIKSed 144 Character data too long The text parameter contains more than 12 characters 148 Character data not allowed The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command Example The command RCL requires the entry of a number 158 String data not allowed The command contains a valid character string at a position which is not allowed Example A text parameter is entered
250. sijska 89 1000 Ljubljana Protea Data Systems Pty Ltd Private Bag X19 Bramley 2018 Protea Data Systems Pty Ltd Cape Town Branch Unit G9 Centurion Business Park Bosmandam Road ilnerton Cape Town 7441 Rohde amp Schwarz Espana S A Salcedo 11 28034 Madrid Rohde amp Schwarz Espana S A Av Princep d Ast ries 66 08012 Barcelona Dynatel Communications PTE Ltd 451 A Kandy Road Kelaniya SolarMan Co Ltd P O Box 11 545 orth of Fraouq Cementry 6 7 9 Bldg 16 Karthoum Rohde amp Schwarz Sverige AB Flygfaltsgatan 15 128 30 Skarpnack Roschi Rohde amp Schwarz AG hlestr 7 3063 Ittigen Electro Scientific Office Baghdad Street Dawara Clinical Lab Bldg P 0 Box 8162 Damascus Tel 966 1 293 20 35 Fax 966 1 466 16 57 akanbar gentec com sa Tel 381 11 305 50 25 Fax 381 11 305 50 24 rs scg rscs rohde schwarz com Tel 65 68 46 18 72 Fax 65 68 46 12 52 Tel 65 68 46 37 10 Fax 65 68 46 00 29 info rssg rohde schwarz com Tel 421 2 65 42 24 88 Fax 421 2 65 42 07 68 3s special sk Tel 386 1 423 46 51 Fax 386 1 423 46 11 rs slovenia rssi rohde schwarz com Tel 27 11 719 57 00 Communications and Measurement Division Fax 27 11 786 58 91 unicm protea co za Tel 27 21 555 36 32 Fax 27 21 555 42 67 unicm protea co za el 34 91 334 10 70 Fax 34 91 729 05 06 rses rses rohde schwarz com el
251. solamente deber n ser conectados para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente de contacto de seguridad y con conductor protector conectado Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupci n intencionada del conductor protector tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto ya que puede tener como consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente por el producto Si se utilizaran cables o enchufes de extensi n se deber poner al seguro que es controlado su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red se deber considerar el enchufe del cable de distribuci n como interruptor En estos casos deber asegurar de que el enchufe sea de f cil acceso y nabejo medida del cable de distribuci n aproximadamente 2 m Los interruptores de funci n o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si los productos sin interruptor est n integrados en construciones o instalaciones se deber instalar el interruptor al nivel de la instalaci n p gina 3 12 13 14 16 17 18 Informaciones de seguridad No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable el ctrico Asegure a trav s de las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de el ctrico no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l por ejemplo al tropezar o por un golpe de corriente Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en red
252. sona cosa pueda ser da ada El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del maluso del producto Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las instrucciones del correspondiente manual del uso y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso de los productos hace necesarios conocimientos profundos y el conocimiento del idioma ingl s Por eso se deber tener en cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso de los productos a personas p ritas o debidamente minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de R amp S encontrar la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente S mbolos y definiciones de seguridad l A iCuidado Informaciones Ver manual i a Ee si Elementos de para Peligro de iAdvertencia Conexi n a o Conexi n u de SE we Conexi n construci n a maquinaria golpe de Superficie conductor A a masa 5 instrucciones 4 E a tierra con peligro de con uns peso corriente caliente protector conductora del uso carga de gt 18kg Z electroest tica
253. ssceccesosecsesnsstsnesesvenservecteuseesenoeees 5 5 interface messages Minimum value commands Modulation DAMA eet EE Ehe external signal FM ie s le o CEEE E E EAT incompatible modulation types d eier 4 10 modulation generator 4 10 mutual switch off 4 11 overview of modulation types 4 10 Tel 6 32 Pulse nie 4 15 two tone modulaton nr nnnnnnnnnnnenennnn 4 11 Modulation depth AM asror ee E 4 13 6 13 Modulation source EN 4 10 ele ET 4 10 Modulation types switching On off u22 202 ae 4 53 Modules indication 6 8 MSS bits chit eile Wn a ei eh ee 5 19 Mullins Aa ia 4 2 fTEQUENCV ernennen 4 1 N NANA EA AO 5 10 New Line command line NINE sun ass Non interrrupting level setting nennen nennen 4 4 Note Unleveled EE 4 3 NENA enna eainiie 5 17 Numeric input feld 1 5 Numeric values Numerical suffix E 1 SMR O Offset e el E 4 1 43 ON Off switch u nes ann 1 8 Operating hours Counter nono 4 51 Operating time Counter ooocioccicccincconiciccnnocacancconna nena nnn canon 6 8 Operation general instructions ooononninccnnnnnicnnnccnnnccccnnarananrana nario 1 1 putting into Operation 1 1 TOMOtO CONTO ERAEPEPERFFIEROFPFFERBELFIFEFETERCEPFFEURLTFIEGSFIEREPEFFEFS 6 1 Operation Complete bit 5 20 OPERation Status Register sum bi 5 19 OSCHIOSCODG EE 4 27 Out
254. strument accepts as well These designations are to be preferred if compatibility is important The following table provides an overview SMR designation SCPI designation Command with manual control AUTO IMMediate Mode Auto SINGle BUS Mode Single or Step EXTernal EXTernal Mode Ext Trig Single or Ext Trig Step AUTO The trigger is free running i e the trigger requirement is permanently met As soon as a sweep has been terminated the next one is started SINGle Triggering is effected by means of IEC bus commands TRIG SWE IMM or TRG If SOUR SWE MODE is set to STEP a step in the case of the AUTO setting a complete sweep is executed EXTernal Triggering is effected from outside via the EXT TRIG socket or by the GET command via IEC IEEE bus The action triggered depends on the setting of the sweep mode as in the case of SINGle Example TRIG SWE SOUR AUTO RST value is SING TRIGger LIST This node contains all commands to trigger a list in the List mode The commands are only valid for TRIG1 TRIGger LIST IMMediate The command immediately starts the processing of a list of the List mode It corresponds to command Execute Single Mode of the List menu This command is an event and thus has no RST value Example TRIG LIST IMM 1104 3430 12 6 53 E 1 TRIGger SMR TRIGger LIST SOURce AUTO SINGIe EXTernal The command specifies the trigger source The naming of the p
255. t Remark Unit SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF CSET CATalog FREE query only query only SELect name of table DATA FREQuency 1 GHz to Fmax LI GHz to Fmax Hz witht option SMR B11 above 10 MHz POWer 20 to 20dB 20 to 20dB dB POINts DELete name of table ALL query only SOURce CORRection STATe ON OFF The command switches the table selected using SOUR CORR CSET on or off Example SOUR CORR STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce CORRection CSET The commands to select and edit the Ucor tables are under this node SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog The command requests a list of Ucor tables The individual lists are separated by means of commas This command is a query and has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CAT Answer UCOR1 UCOR2 UCOR3 SOURce CORRection CSET FREE This command queries the free space in the Ucor table The command is a query and thus has no RST value Example SOUR CORR FREE 1104 3430 12 6 15 E 1 SOURce CORRection SMR SOURce CORRection CSET SELect name of table The command selects a Ucor table This command alone does not yet effect a correction First the table selected must be activated cf SOUR CORR STAT If there is no table of this name a new table is created The name may contain up to 7 letters This command triggers an event and hence has no RST value Example SOUR CORR CSET SEL UCOR1
256. t attained The maximum possible RF output level varies depending on the model and the options fitted see data sheet Further settings Level Sweep Sweep menu Menu selection Level Level 10 000 000 0000 ch Level eye 0 0 de 25 0 dEm Attenuator Mode Athen Fired Range 0 0 dEm to urdeueled Knob Step User 1 0 dE Enob Step Decimal Power Resolution 0 1 de Power On State Previous Exclude fram Recall Diff Fig 4 3 Level menu with option SMR B15 attenuator 20 GHz Amplitude Input value of RF level at RF output connector IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW 30 Offset Input value of level offset of a subsequent attenuator amplifier Input value in dB see section Level Offset IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW OFFS 0 Limit Input value of level limit This value indicates the upper limit of the level at the RF output connector A warning is output in the status line if an attempt is made to set a level above this limit IEC IEEE bus command SOUR POW LIM 16 dBm 1104 3430 12 4 3 E 1 RF Level Attenuator Mode Atten Fixed Range Knob Step User Knob Step Power Resolution Power On State Exclude from Recall 1104 3430 12 SMR Auto Normal setting The mechanically switched attenuator switches in steps of 10 dB at fixed points IEC IEEE bus command OUTP AMOD AUTO Fixed Level settings are made without switching the attenuator see section Non Interrupting Level Setting IEC IEEE bus command OUTP AM
257. t functions are automatically monitored during operation If a faulty function is detected in the selftest ERROR is displayed in the status line To identify the error the ERROR menu in which the error messages are entered can be called by pressing the ERROR key cf Chapter 9 Error Messages The tests can additionally be called via the menu Access to the tests is offered by the Utilities Test menu Menu selection Utilities Test 10 000 000 0000 cH Not tested Plot tested Plot tested Fig 4 43 Menu Utilities Test EPROM Tests the EPROM The test result is displayed in a window IEC IEEE bus command TEST ROM RAM Tests the RAM The test result is displayed in a window IEC IEEE bus command TEST RAM RAM Battery Tests the RAM battery The test result is displayed in a window IEC IEEE bus command TEST BATT 1104 3430 12 4 52 E 1 SMR Utilities Assigning Modulations to the MOD ON OFF Key ModKey Modulation types can be switched on off in the modulation menus and with the MOD ON OFF key It can be defined in the Utilities ModKey menu for which modulation types the MOD ON OFF key is to be effective The key is effective either for all types of modulation or only for a selected modulation Function of MOD ON OFF key if effective for only one type of modulation gt The status on off of the selected modulation type will change at each keypress Function of MOD ON OFF key
258. ted the message ERROR is displayed in the status line For further identification of the error press the ERROR key Thereupon a description of the error is displayed cf Chapter 9 section Error Messages Return to the menu exited by pressing the BACK key If required internal test points can be polled by the user and the results be read out and displayed Cf Service Manual Instrument Mounting into a 19 Rack Caution Ensure free air inlet at the perforation of the side walls and air outlet at the rear of the instrument in rack mounting The SMR can be mounted into a 19 rack by means of rack adapter ZZA 94 stock no 396 4905 00 The mounting instructions are attached to the adapter 1104 3430 12 1 3 E 1 Front Panel SMR Explanation of Front and Rear Panel Elements of the Front Panel e EXT1 Input external modulation signal alternatively for AM FM ASK and FSK EXT2 Input external modulation signal alternatively for AM and FM 1104 0002 02 2 DISPLAY Cf Chapter 3 for the design of the display MENU VARIATION 3 Parameter field a H E Parameters RF frequency and RF level can be entered z 1 B directly by means of the parameter keys alternatively to menu operation Further complete instrument settings can R e be stored and called FREQ Opens the setting of the RF frequency via value EN input or variation by means of a rotary knob The
259. the same function as the SELECT key If the rotary knob is pressed while BACK is selected the menu cursor wraps back to the menu last called SELECT key The SELECT key acknowledges the selection marked by means of the menu cursor Depending on the position the next lower menu level or the the respective setting is called BACK key The BACK key returns the menu cursor to the next higher menu level the menu cursor is shifted to the left into the preceding column of the menu structure resets the menu cursor from frequency or level value indication in the header field into the menu field to the menu called last closes the display pages called using keys STATUS HELP and ERROR again Settings are accessed in the setting menus ending with the right hand display margin 10 000 000 000 0 ch AM Depth AM Source Scan State 1104 3430 12 3 2 E 1 SMR Basic Operating Steps Selection and Change of Parameters Select parameter Change setting value Via value inputs Using rotary knob 1104 3430 12 gt Set the menu cursor to the name of the parameter desired using the rotary knob e g to AM Depth in the AM menu cf Fig 3 2 gt Select parameter gt Press SELECT key or rotary knob The menu cursor changes from the parameter selected in the left hand column of the setting menu to the setting value on the right e g from AM Depth to 30 cf Fig 3 2 gt Press the first digit
260. tic SMR DIAGnostic INFO MODules The command queries the modules existing in the instrument with their model and state of modification numbers The response supplied is a list in which the different entries are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the equipment of the instrument Each entry consists of three parts which are separated by means of blanks 1 Name of module 2 Variant of module in the form VarXX XX 2 digits 3 Revision of module in the form RevXX XX 2 digits Example DIAG INFO MOD Response ROSC VARO1 REVOO DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe The command reads out the internal operating time counter The response supplies the number of hours the instrument has been in operation Example DIAG INFO OTIM Response 19 DIAGnostic INFO SDATe The command queries the date of software creation The response is returned in the form year month day Example DIAG INFO SDAT Response 1992 12 19 DIAGnostic MEASure The commands which trigger a measurement in the instrument and return the measured value are under this node DIAGnostic MEASure POINt The command triggers a measurement at a measuring point and returns the voltage measured The measuring point is specified by a numeric suffix cf service manual Example DIAG MEAS POIN2 Response 3 52 1104 3430 12 6 8 E 1 SMR DISPlay DISPLAY System This system contains the commands to configure the scre
261. ties System OPE GFIE Address Fig 4 34 Utilities System GPIB Address menu GPIB Address Input value of IEC IEEE bus address IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 28 1104 3430 12 4 43 E 1 Utilities SMR Parameters of RS 232 C Interface System RS232 Settings for the configuration of the RS 232 C interface can be made in the System RS232 submenu The pin assignment of the interface corresponds to that ofa PC Menu selection Utilities System RS232 11 000 0000000 oul 20 0 dem Baud Fate Data Format 1 Bit On OFF Fig 4 35 Utilities System RS232 menu Baud Rate Selection of transmission rate IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER BAUD 9600 Data Format Indication of number of data bits This value is permanently set and cannot be changed Parity Setting of parity This setting defines the transmission mode for the parity bit for error protection The following modes are available Odd odd parity Even even parity None no parity IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PAR ODD Stop Bit Indication of number of stop bits This value is permanently set and cannot be changed Handshake Selection of handshake None No handshake IEC IEEE bus command SYST COMM SER PACE NONE SYST COMM SER CONT RTS ON RTS CTS Hardware handshake via interface lines RTS and CTS This setting is to be preferred to the XON XOFF setting if the host computer permits it IEC IEEE bus command SYST C
262. to DIO 8 Transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in ASCI ISO code DIO1 is the least significant bit DIO8 the most significant 1104 3430 12 5 25 E 1 Interfaces SMR 2 Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear Active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting ATN Attention Active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages Inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request Active LOW enables the instrument to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable Active LOW enables switchover to remote control EOI End or Identify This has two functions in conjunction with ATN ATN HIGH Active LOW marks the end of a data transmission ATN LOW Active LOW triggers a parallel poll 3 Handshake bus with 3 lines DAV Data Valid Active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD Not Ready For Data Active LOW signals that one of the devices connected is not ready to accept data NDAC Not Data Accepted Active LOW as long as the instrument is accepting the data present on the data bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface functions Table 5 5 lists the interface functions relevant for the instrument Table 5 5 Interface functions Control Interface functions character SH1 Handshake source function Source
263. tput level is reduced by a constant value when the marker frequency is executed OFF The output level remains unchanged RST value is OFF Example SOUR MARK1 FSW AMP ON SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FSWeep AOFF Command All markers off switches off all frequency markers This command triggers an event thus it has no RST value and no query form Example SOUR MARK FSW AOFF 1104 3430 12 6 27 E 1 SOURce MARKer SMR SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FSWeep FREQueng 1 GHz to Fmax 10 MHZ to Fmax with Option SMR B11 The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the frequency indicated Here like for the input value MARKER in the Sweep Frequency menu the Offset and Multiplier values of the FREQuency subsystem are taken into account Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for SOUR FREQ OFFS 0 RST value for MARK1 10 GHz MARK2 15 GHz Example SOUR MARK1 FSW FREQ 3 GHz MARK3 20 GHz SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FSWeep 5ATe ON OFF The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix after MARKer on or off Example SOUR MARK1 FSW STAT ON RST value is OFF SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PSWeep The commands for the markers with level sweep are under this node Power sweep The ten markers are distinguished by a numeric suffix after MARKer SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PSWeepAOFF The command switches all level ma
264. trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deber este como posici n de funcionamiento se define ser desconectado de la corriente El ajuste principialmente la posici n con el suelo de la el cambio de partes la manutenci n y la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X reparaci n deber n ser solamente grado de suciedad 2 categor a de efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por sobrecarga el ctrica 2 utilizar solamente en R amp S Si se reponen partes con importancia estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m para los aspectos de seguridad por ejemplo sobre el nivel del mar el enchufe los transformadores o los A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos hoja de datos se aplicar una tolerancia de por partes originales Despues de cada 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 recambio de partes elementales para la sobre la frecuencia nominal seguridad deber ser efectuado un control de 1171 0000 42 02 00 p gina 2 Informaciones de seguridad seguridad control a primera vista control de conductor protector medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de medici n de la corriente conductora control de funcionamiento Como en todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede ser excluido en general de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos que puedan generar alergias los llamados elementos alerg nicos por ejemplo el n quel Si se producieran en el trato con productos R amp S
265. trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step single step mode The frequency increases by the value defined under SOUR2 SWE STEP SOUR2 SWE MODE AUTO Example RST value is AUTO 1104 3430 12 6 42 E 1 SMR SOURce2 SWEep SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency SPACing LINear LOGarithmic The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings Example SOUR2 SWE SPAC LOG RST value is LIN SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP The commands to set the step width with linear and logarithmic sweeps are under this node The settings of STEP LIN and STEP LOG are independent of each other SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 to 10 MHz The command sets the step width with the linear sweep If STEP LIN is changed the value of POINts valid for SPAC LIN also changes according to the formula defined under POINts A change of SPAN does not cause a change of STEP LIN Keyword LIN can be omitted then the command conforms to SCPI regulation see example Example SOUR2 SWE STEP 10kHz RST value is 1 kHz SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 to 100PCT This command defines the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated as follows if STARt lt STOP New frequency previous frequency STEP LOG x previous frequency STEP LOG therefore indicates th
266. ttings hence affect both types of digital modulations Default Unit Parameters Remark Command SOURce DM TYPE ASK FSK STATe ON OFF EXTernal IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm Ohm ASK Option SMR B5 DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT POLarity NORMal INVerted FSK Option SMR B5 DEViation 0 kHz to 20 40 MHz Hz POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURce DM TYPE ASK FSK The command selects the modulation type ASK Amplitude Shift Keying FSK Frequency Shift Keying Example SOUR DM TYPE FSK RST value is FSK SOURce DM STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off tne modulation selected under SOUR DM TYPE Example SOUR DM STAT OFF RST value is OFF SOURce DM EXTernal The commands to configure the EXT 1 input are under this node SOURce DM EXTernal IMPedance 600 Ohm 100 kOhm The command defines the input impedance of the external DM input EXT1 This command is coupled to the commands SOUR AM EXT IMP and SOUR FM EXT IMP Example SOUR DM EXT IMP 100kOhm RST value is 100 kOhm 1104 3430 12 6 17 E 1 SOURce DM SMR SOURce DM ASK The commands to set the external data source for the digital amplitude modulation are under this node SOURce DM ASK DEPTh 0 to 100 This command sets the modulation depth RST value is 10 kHz Example SOUR DM ASK DEPT 10E3 SOURce DM ASK POLarity NORMal INVerted The command defines the polarity of the modulation NORMal A 0 from
267. uency MANual 1 GHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 6 22 SOURce FREQuency MODE SOURce FREQuency MULTiplier 10 MHz to Fmax CW FIXed SWEep LIST 1 0 to 10 0 6 22 6 22 SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 50 to 50 GHz 6 22 SOURce FREQuency SPAN Fmax 1 GHz with Option SMR B11 Fmax 10 MHz SOURce FREQuency STARt 1 GHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 10 MHz to Fmax SOURce FREQuency STOP 1 GHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 6 23 10 MHz to Fmax SOURce F REQuency STEP INCRement 0 to 10 GHz 6 23 SOURce LIST CATalog not SCPI 6 24 SOURce LIST DELete List name not SCPI 6 24 6 22 6 23 SOURce LIST DELete ALL not SCPI 6 24 SOURce LIST DWELI 1msto1s 6 25 SOURce LIST DWELI POINts 6 25 SOURce LIST FREE not SCPI 6 25 SOURce LIST FREQuency 1 GHZ to Fmax 1 GHz to Fmax Bloc 6 25 data Option SMR B11 above 10 MHz SOURce LIST FREQuency POINts 6 25 SOURce LIST MODE AUTO STEP not SCPI 6 26 SOURce LIST POWer 130 to 25 dBm 130 to 25 dBm 6 26 SOURce LIST POWer POINts Bloc data 20 to 25dBm w o SMR B15 SOURce LIST SELect List name not SCPI 6 26 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FSWeep AMPLitude ON OFF SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 819 1 0 F SWeep AOFF 6 27 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FSWeep FREQuency 1 GHz to Fmax with Option SMR B11 6 28 10 MH
268. um cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties consult a physician immediately to determine the cause Sheet 2 Safety Instructions 4 Ifproducts components are mechanically and or thermically processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled e g for disposal purposes by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 5 If handling the product yields hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation 6 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn life requires increased protection pregnant women should be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be endangered by electromagnetic radiation The employer is required to assess workplaces where th
269. unto de peligro que puede llevar hasta heridas leves o peque as CUIDADO Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia da arlo INFORMACI N Indica una situaci n en la que deber an seguirse las instrucciones en el uso del producto pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un da o del mismo Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el mbito de la comunidad econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n Por eso se debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Informaciones de seguridad elementales 1 El producto solamente debe ser utilizado 2 Entodos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en seg n lo indicado por el fabricante referente cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de a la situaci n y posici n de funcionamiento trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes El sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se producto solamente debe de ser abierto por convino de otra manera es para los personal p rito autorizado Antes de efectuar productos R amp S v lido lo que sigue
270. ured that an event for example a PLL that has not locked can produce a service request throughout all hierarchical levels Note The service request enable SRE register defined in IEEE 488 2 can be taken as the ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured in accordance with SCPI Analogously the ESE can be taken as the ENABle part of the ESR 1104 3430 12 5 17 E 1 Status Reporting System Overview of Status Registers Error Queue Output buffer 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 not implemented 7 6 5 4 3 SRQ a f 0 d STATus OPERation Register RQS MSS amp ESB amp H MAV amp EIER 15 14 SRE STB ha 12 11 10 9 8 amp 7 not implemented amp 6 amp 5 amp 4 amp 3 amp 2 4 0 PPE A STATus QUEStionable Register IST flag i Response to parallel poll amp 7 Power on amp 6 User Request amp 5 Command Error amp 4 Execution Error amp 3 Device Dependent Error amp logical AND amp 2 Query Error logical OR amp 1 Request Control of all bits 8 LO Operation Complete ESE ESR Fig 5 4 Overview of status registers 1104 3430 12 5 18 SMR E 1 SMR Status Reporting System Description of Status Registers Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lo
271. utting the product into operation for the first time make sure to read the following Safety Instructions Rohde amp Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer its customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment required for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system This product has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions Rohde amp Schwarz will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with
272. vice request enable SRE mask register The STB register receives information from the standard event status register ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with the associated standard event status enable ESE mask register and from the registers STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed infor mation on the instrument The status reporting system further comprises the IST flag Individual STatus with the parallel poll enable PPE register allocated to it The IST flag like the SRQ combines the entire instrument state in a single bit The function fulfilled by the PPE register for the IST flag corresponds to that fulfilled by the SRE for the service request The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller The output buffer is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB register and is therefore shown in Fig 5 4 Structure of an SCPI Status Register Each SCPI register consists of five parts each of 16 bits width which have different functions see Fig 5 3 The individual bits are independent of each other ie each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts For example bit 3 of the STATus OPERation register is assigned to the hardware status Wait for trigger for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all five parts This allows the controller to pr
273. wer registers It can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The status byte is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STB is assigned an SRE The SRE functionally corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit of the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated on the IEC IEEE bus which triggers an interrupt in the controller if the controller is configured correspondingly and can be further processed there The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE Table 5 2 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No Meaning 2 Error Queue Not Empty This bit is set if an entry is made in the error queue If the bit is enabled by the SRE each entry in the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and determined in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved in IEC IEEE bus control 3 QUEStionable Status sum bit This bit is set if an EVEN bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENA
274. wise 0 V INVers When running through the marker condition 0 V is applied at the marker output otherwise TTL level Example SOUR2 MARK1 POL INV RST value is NORM 1104 3430 12 6 41 E 1 SOURce2 SWEep SMR SOURce2 SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commande to control the LF sweep of SOURce2 LF Sweeps are activated by command SOUR2 MODE SWE Sweeps are triggered on principle Command Parameters Default Remark Unit SOURce2 SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG FREQuency DWELI 10msto5s s MODE AUTO MANual STEP SPACing LINear LOGarithmic STEP LINear 0 to 10MHz Hz LOGarithmic 0 01 PCT to 100 PCT PCT SOURce2 SWEep BTIMe NORMal LONG The command sets the blank time Blank TlMe of the sweep The setting is valid for all sweeps i e also for RF sweeps NORMal Blank time as short as possible LONG Blank time long enough to permit an X Y recorder to return to 0 Example SOUR2 SWE BTIM LONG RST value is NORM SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node Keyword FREQuency can be omitted Then the commands are SCPI compatible unless stated otherwise see examples SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency DWELI 10msto5s The command sets the time per frequency step dwell Example SOUR2 SWE DWEL 20ms RST value is 15 ms SOURce2 SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command specifies the run of the sweep AUTO Each
275. xample The instrument does not have sufficient memory space 224 Illegal parameter value The parameter value is invalid Example An invalid text parameter is entered eg TRIGger SWEep SOURce TASTe 225 Out of memory The available instrument memory space is exhausted Example An attempt was made to create more than 10 lists 223 Too much data 226 Lists not of same length The parts of a list have different lengths This error message is also displayed if only part of a list has been transmitted via the IEC IEEE bus All parts of a list have to be transmitted before the list is executed Example The POWer part of a list is longer than the FREQuency part or only the POWer part has been transmitted 230 Data corrupt or stale The data are incomplete or invalid Example The instrument has aborted a measurement 240 Hardware error The command cannot be executed because of a hardware fault of the instrument 241 Hardware missing The command cannot be executed because of hardware missing Example An option is not fitted 255 Directory full The list management cannot accept any more lists since the maximum number of lists has already been attained Example An attempt was made to create more than the allowed number of MEM SEQ lists 1104 3430 12 9 4 E 1 SMR Error Messages Device Specific Error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Error code Error text with queue poll Explanation of error
276. z to Fmax SOURce MARKer1 N 3 4 5 6 7 8 Kei 10 FSWeep STATe SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PSWeep AOFF ON OFF not SCPI 6 28 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PSWeep POWer 130 dBm to 25 dBm w o Option SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm not SCPI 6 27 SOURce MARKer1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PSWeep STATe ON OFF 1104 3430 12 Inotscp 6 28 List of Commands SMR Command Parameter SCPI info Page SOURce POWer ALC REFerence loto 3 V 6 29 SOURce POWer ALC SEArch 6 29 SOURce POWer ALC SOURce INTernal DIODe PMETer 6 29 SOURce POWer ALC SOURce PMETer RS_NRVS HP436A HP437 6 30 HP438A SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFF 6 30 SOURce POWer LEVel MMediate AMPLitude 130 dBm to 25 dBm w o Option 6 30 SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm l SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPL OFFSet 100 to 100 dB 6 30 SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 130 dBm to 25 dBm w o Option 6 31 SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm SOURce POWer MANual 130 dBm to 25 dBm w o Option 6 31 SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm l SOURce POWer MODE CW FlXed SWEep LIST 6 31 SOURce POWer STARt 130 dBm to 25 dBm w o Option 6 31 SMR B15 20 dBm to 25 dBm SOURce POWer STOP 130 dBm to 25 dBm w o Option 6 31 SMR B15 20 dBm 25 dBm SOURce

Manual - TRS RenTelco

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents